WO2022017348A1 - 侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022017348A1
WO2022017348A1 PCT/CN2021/107248 CN2021107248W WO2022017348A1 WO 2022017348 A1 WO2022017348 A1 WO 2022017348A1 CN 2021107248 W CN2021107248 W CN 2021107248W WO 2022017348 A1 WO2022017348 A1 WO 2022017348A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
srb
rlc
configuration information
bearer
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2021/107248
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
才宇
徐海博
姚楚婷
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to JP2023504619A priority Critical patent/JP7536996B2/ja
Priority to US18/006,444 priority patent/US12550209B2/en
Priority to EP21845858.6A priority patent/EP4178145A4/en
Publication of WO2022017348A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022017348A1/zh
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/14—Direct-mode setup
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/30—Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes
    • H04W4/40—Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes for vehicles, e.g. vehicle-to-pedestrians [V2P]
    • H04W4/44—Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes for vehicles, e.g. vehicle-to-pedestrians [V2P] for communication between vehicles and infrastructures, e.g. vehicle-to-cloud [V2C] or vehicle-to-home [V2H]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signalling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/40—Resource management for direct mode communication, e.g. D2D or sidelink
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/11—Allocation or use of connection identifiers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02—Terminal devices
    • H04W88/04—Terminal devices adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and more particularly, to a method and a communication device for configuring a sidelink signaling radio bearer.
  • V2X communication is an important key technology for realizing environmental perception and information interaction in the Internet of Vehicles.
  • the communication link between different user terminal equipments may be referred to as a sidelink (SL).
  • Vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication with other entities can be performed using sidelinks.
  • V2X communication can be regarded as a special case of device to device (D2D) communication.
  • D2D device to device
  • the communication link between different terminal devices can be called SL.
  • the vehicle-to-vehicle communication link may be SL.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the network device through the relay of the relay terminal device.
  • how the terminal device transmits the control signaling between the terminal device and the network device through the relay is not defined at present, so that the quality of the transmission of the control signaling cannot be guaranteed, and the efficiency of the transmission of the control signaling is low.
  • the present application provides a method and a communication device for configuring a radio bearer for sidelink signaling.
  • a SL RLC bearer By configuring a SL RLC bearer on the PC5 interface on the sidelink for the Uu SRB of a remote terminal device, the SL RLC bearer is established. to transmit the Uu SRB.
  • Using the SL RLC bearer between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment to transmit the control signaling carried by the Uu SRB can improve the quality of the control signaling transmitted by the Uu SRB and improve the efficiency of control signaling transmission.
  • a method for configuring a sidelink signaling radio bearer is provided.
  • the execution body of the method may be either a remote terminal device or a chip applied to the remote terminal device.
  • the remote terminal equipment transmits data and signaling between the relay terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the method includes: a first terminal device (that is, a remote terminal device) receiving first configuration information through a second terminal device (that is, a relay terminal device), where the first configuration information includes or indicates a configuration for configuring the first terminal device and The information carried by the first sidelink radio link on the sidelink between the second terminal devices controls the SL RLC bearer; the first terminal device establishes the first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information, the The first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB; the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the at least one first SRB (that is, at least one Uu SRB) through the second terminal device.
  • a first terminal device that is, a remote terminal device
  • the first configuration information includes or indicates a configuration for configuring the first terminal device and
  • the information carried by the first sidelink radio link on the sidelink between the second terminal devices controls the SL RLC bearer
  • the first terminal device establishes the first SL RLC bearer according to
  • a method for configuring a sidelink signaling radio bearer is provided, and the execution body of the method may be either a remote terminal device or a chip applied to the remote terminal device.
  • the remote terminal equipment transmits data and signaling between the relay terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the method includes: a first terminal device (ie, a remote terminal device) acquires first configuration information, where the first configuration information is predefined, and the first configuration information includes or indicates a configuration for configuring the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device establishes the first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information , the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB; the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the at least one first SRB through the second terminal device.
  • a first SL RLC bearer is established between a first terminal device and a second terminal device, and the first terminal device can pass the second terminal device.
  • the device transmits control signaling with the network device on the at least one first SRB.
  • the Uu SRB is transmitted by using the SL RLC bearer, which can ensure the normal transmission of the control signaling on the Uu SRB of the first terminal equipment, and improve the Uu SRB. Quality and efficiency of transmitted control signaling.
  • the radio bearer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal device includes a DRB for transmitting user plane data and an SRB for transmitting control plane data.
  • the Uu DRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the DRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment
  • the Uu SRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the SRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the Uu SRB needs to be transmitted to the relay terminal device through the PC5 interface first, and then forwarded by the relay terminal device to the wireless access network device.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the user between the first terminal device and the network device surface data. That is to say: the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the first SL RLC bearer is different from the second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink, and the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to the second signaling radio bearer SRB (ie SL SRB), the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the second terminal device on the second SRB.
  • the first terminal device transmits control signaling or control plane data with the second terminal device on the second SRB.
  • the first terminal device and the second The terminal device can distinguish the Uu SRB and the SL SRB on the SL between the first terminal device and the second terminal device according to different SL RLC bearers. After distinguishing the Uu SRB and the SL SRB, it can correctly distinguish the Uu SRB and the SL SRB.
  • the control signaling carried by the SL SRB ensures the accurate transmission of the control signaling and improves the data transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears the corresponding SL RLC configuration information, the first SL RLC bears the corresponding logical channel configuration information, the first SL RLC bearer's index or identity, the at least one first SRB's identity or index, or the The first SL RLC bears one or more of the corresponding logical channel identifiers LCID.
  • SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to Uu SRB0 is defined in the protocol.
  • the default SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to Uu SRB1/Uu SRB2/Uu SRB3 is defined in the standard protocol.
  • the network device can also configure the SL RLC bearer configuration of Uu SRB1/Uu SRB2/Uu SRB3. It should be understood that the SL RLC bearers corresponding to Uu SRB1, Uu SRB2 and Uu SRB3 respectively may be different RLC bearers.
  • the first configuration information is determined by a network device.
  • the network device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device through the second terminal device.
  • the first configuration information is first sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and then forwarded by the second terminal device to the first terminal device. That is, the first terminal device receives the first configuration information sent by the network device through the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal device sending second configuration information to the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is based on the first configuration information definite.
  • the first terminal device may determine the second configuration information according to the first configuration information , and the second configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SLRLC bearer.
  • the content included in the second configuration information may be the same as the content included in the first configuration information, or, the content included in the second configuration information may also be a subset of the content included in the first configuration information, or the second configuration
  • the content included in the information is different content from the first configuration information determined according to the first configuration information, or part of the content included in the second configuration information may be the same as part of the content included in the first configuration information.
  • the second configuration information includes: a logical channel identifier LCID corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, where the LCID is used to identify the logic channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer channel. Or, used to identify the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the first configuration information is determined by the second terminal device according to third configuration information, and the third configuration information is sent by the network device to the second terminal equipment, the third configuration information is used for the second terminal equipment to establish the first SL RLC bearer, or for the second terminal equipment to establish the SL RLC bearer corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the third configuration information includes: the SLRLC configuration information corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, the configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer, the at least An identifier or index of a first SRB, or one or more of the LCIDs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal device receives fourth configuration information through the second terminal device, where the fourth configuration information includes: the first SL RLC The index or identifier of the bearer, and the configuration information of each first SRB in the at least one first SRB, where the configuration information of the first SRB includes: PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB.
  • the first terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC and through the second terminal device.
  • the fourth configuration information only needs to include the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer without carrying the specific configuration information of the first SL RLC bearer, which can save signaling overhead and improve resource utilization.
  • the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB and the index or identifier carried by the first SL RLC may be placed in the same IE, or may be placed in different IEs.
  • the fourth configuration information may be sent at one time, or may be sent through different signaling.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal device sending fifth configuration information to the second terminal device, where the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: the first terminal device SL The index or identity carried by the RLC, and, the identity or index of at least one first SRB.
  • the second terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs borne by the first SL RLC. Therefore, it can be ensured that the second terminal device transmits the control signaling between the first terminal device and the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC.
  • the packet data convergence protocol data unit PDCP PDU of at least one first SRB includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the first indication information corresponding to the PDCP PDU. an SRB.
  • the protocol stack of the first terminal device includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located between the radio link control RLC layer and the packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer , the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU of at least one first SRB includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first SRB corresponding to the adaptation layer PDU.
  • At least the first SRB includes at least one of the first SRB0, the first SRB1, the first SRB2, and the first SRB3.
  • a method for signaling radio bearer configuration is provided, and the execution body of the method may be either a network device or a chip applied to the network device.
  • the remote terminal equipment transmits data and signaling between the relay terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the method includes: a network device sends first configuration information to a first terminal device (ie a remote terminal device) through a second terminal device (ie a relay terminal device), where the first configuration information includes or indicates that the first configuration information is used to configure the first terminal device.
  • the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB; the The network device transmits control signaling with the first terminal device on the at least one first SRB (that is, at least one Uu SRB) through the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can establish the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • a SL RLC bearer thus realizing the side link between the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment, using the SL RLC bearer to transmit the Uu SRB, can ensure the normal control signaling on the Uu SRB of the first terminal equipment transmission to improve the quality and efficiency of control signaling transmitted by Uu SRB.
  • the radio bearer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal device includes a DRB for transmitting user plane data and an SRB for transmitting control plane data.
  • the Uu DRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the DRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment
  • the Uu SRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the SRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the Uu SRB or Uu DRB needs to be transmitted to the relay terminal device through the PC5 interface first, and then forwarded by the relay terminal device to the network device.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the first terminal device and the network User plane data between devices. That is, the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends third configuration information to the second terminal device, where the third configuration information is used for the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears the corresponding SL RLC configuration information, the first SL RLC bears the corresponding logical channel configuration information, the first SL RLC bearer's index or identity, the at least one first SRB's identity or index, or the The first SL RLC bears one or more of the corresponding logical channel identifiers LCID.
  • the third configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears the corresponding SL RLC configuration information, the first SL RLC bears the corresponding logical channel configuration information, the first SL RLC bearer's index or identity, the at least one first SRB's identity or index, or the The first SL RLC carries one or more of the corresponding LCIDs.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the first terminal device and the network device. between user plane data. That is, the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends fourth configuration information to the first terminal device through the second terminal device.
  • the network device first sends the fourth configuration information to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device directly forwards it to the first terminal device.
  • the network device first sends the sixth configuration information to the second terminal device, the second terminal device determines the fourth configuration information according to the sixth configuration information, and sends the fourth configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the fourth configuration information includes: an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC, and configuration information of each first SRB in the at least one first SRB, where the configuration information of the first SRB includes: the PDCP corresponding to the first SRB configuration information.
  • the first terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC and through the second terminal device.
  • the fourth configuration information only needs to include the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer without carrying the specific configuration information of the first SL RLC bearer, which can save signaling overhead and improve resource utilization.
  • the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB and the index or identifier carried by the first SL RLC may be placed in the same IE, or may be placed in different IEs.
  • the fourth configuration information may be sent at one time, or may be sent through different signaling.
  • the packet data convergence protocol data unit PDCP PDU of at least one first SRB includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first SRB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • At least the first SRB includes at least one of the first SRB0, the first SRB1, the first SRB2, and the first SRB3.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device receives seventh configuration information sent by the first terminal device or the second terminal device, where the seventh configuration information includes or indicates the first SL RLC bearer or the LCID corresponding to the first SRB.
  • the seventh configuration information may further include or indicate an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC, or the seventh configuration information may further include or indicate an index or an identifier of the first SRB.
  • a method for signaling radio bearer configuration is provided, and the execution body of the method may be either a network device or a chip applied to the network device.
  • the remote terminal equipment transmits data and signaling between the relay terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the method includes: the network device sends third configuration information to the second terminal device (ie, the relay terminal device), where the third configuration information includes or indicates a sideline used to configure the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first sidelink radio link on the link controls the information carried by the SL RLC, and the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB; Control signaling is transmitted with the first terminal device on an SRB (that is, at least one Uu SRB).
  • the method for configuring the signaling radio bearer provided by the fourth aspect, by configuring the configuration information of the first SL RLC bearer between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the second terminal device can establish the first terminal device and the first terminal device.
  • One SL RLC bearer thus realizing the side link between the second terminal equipment and the first terminal equipment, using the SL RLC bearer to transmit the Uu SRB, can ensure the normal control signaling on the Uu SRB of the first terminal equipment transmission to improve the quality and efficiency of control signaling transmitted by Uu SRB.
  • the radio bearer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal device includes a DRB for transmitting user plane data and an SRB for transmitting control plane data.
  • the Uu DRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the DRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment
  • the Uu SRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the SRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the Uu SRB or Uu DRB needs to be transmitted to the relay terminal device through the PC5 interface first, and then forwarded by the relay terminal device to the network device.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the first terminal device and the network User plane data between devices. That is, the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends first configuration information to the first terminal device, where the first configuration information is used by the first terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the network device may send the first configuration information to the first terminal device through the second terminal device.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears the corresponding SL RLC configuration information, the first SL RLC bears the corresponding logical channel configuration information, the first SL RLC bearer's index or identity, the at least one first SRB's identity or index, or the The first SL RLC bears one or more of the corresponding logical channel identifiers LCID.
  • the third configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears the corresponding SL RLC configuration information, the first SL RLC bears the corresponding logical channel configuration information, the first SL RLC bearer's index or identity, the at least one first SRB's identity or index, or the The first SL RLC carries one or more of the corresponding LCIDs.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the first terminal device and the network device. between user plane data. That is, the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends fourth configuration information to the first terminal device through the second terminal device.
  • the network device first sends the fourth configuration information to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device directly forwards it to the first terminal device.
  • the network device first sends the sixth configuration information to the second terminal device, the second terminal device determines the fourth configuration information according to the sixth configuration information, and sends the fourth configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the fourth configuration information includes: an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC, and configuration information of each first SRB in the at least one first SRB, where the configuration information of the first SRB includes: the PDCP corresponding to the first SRB configuration information.
  • the first terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC and through the second terminal device.
  • the fourth configuration information only needs to include the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer without carrying the specific configuration information of the first SL RLC bearer, which can save signaling overhead and improve resource utilization.
  • the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB and the index or identifier carried by the first SL RLC may be placed in the same IE, or may be placed in different IEs.
  • the fourth configuration information may be sent at one time, or may be sent through different signaling.
  • the packet data convergence protocol data unit PDCP PDU of at least one first SRB includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first SRB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • At least the first SRB includes at least one of the first SRB0, the first SRB1, the first SRB2, and the first SRB3.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device receives seventh configuration information sent by the first terminal device or the second terminal device, where the seventh configuration information includes or indicates the first SL RLC bearer or the LCID corresponding to the first SRB.
  • the seventh configuration information may further include or indicate an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC, or the seventh configuration information may further include or indicate an index or an identifier of the first SRB.
  • a method for signaling radio bearer configuration is provided, and the execution body of the method can be either a second terminal device (ie, a relay terminal device) or a chip applied to the second terminal device.
  • the remote terminal equipment transmits data and signaling between the relay terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the method includes: the second terminal device obtains first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes or indicates a configuration for configuring a sidelink between the first terminal device (remote terminal device) and the second terminal device Information carried by the first sidelink radio link control SL RLC; the second terminal device establishes the first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information, and the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio Carry SRB.
  • the method for configuring a sidelink signaling radio bearer establishes a first SL RLC bearer between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, and the first terminal device can use the second terminal device to perform at least one
  • the control signaling is transmitted with the network device on the first SRB.
  • the Uu SRB is transmitted by using the SL RLC bearer, which can ensure the normal transmission of the control signaling on the Uu SRB of the first terminal equipment, and improve the Uu SRB. Quality and efficiency of transmitted control signaling.
  • the radio bearer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal device includes a DRB for transmitting user plane data and an SRB for transmitting control plane data.
  • the Uu DRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the DRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment
  • the Uu SRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the SRB between the remote terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the Uu SRB needs to be transmitted to the relay terminal device through the PC5 interface first, and then forwarded by the relay terminal device to the network device.
  • the second terminal acquires the first configuration information, including:
  • the second terminal device receives the first configuration information sent by the network device, and the second terminal device does not parse the first configuration information; the method further includes: the second terminal device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device; the second terminal device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device; The terminal device receives the second configuration information sent by the first terminal device, where the second configuration information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • the content included in the second configuration information may be the same as the content included in the first configuration information, or, the content included in the second configuration information may also be a subset of the content included in the first configuration information, or the second configuration
  • the content included in the information is different content from the first configuration information determined according to the first configuration information, or part of the content included in the second configuration information may be the same as part of the content included in the first configuration information.
  • the second terminal device obtains the first configuration information, including:
  • the second terminal device receives the third configuration information sent by the network device; the second terminal device determines the first configuration information according to the third configuration information, and the third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer, the The method further includes: the second terminal device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device obtains the first configuration information, including:
  • the second terminal device receives the first configuration information sent by the network device, and the second terminal device does not parse the first configuration information; the method further includes:
  • the second terminal device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device
  • the second terminal device receives the third configuration information sent by the network device, the third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer, and the third configuration information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • the first configuration information is determined and generated by the second terminal device itself.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears the corresponding SL RLC configuration information, the first SL RLC bears the corresponding logical channel configuration information, the first SL RLC bearer's index or identity, the at least one first SRB's identity or index, or the The first SL RLC bears one or more of the corresponding logical channel identifiers LCID.
  • the third configuration information includes: SLRLC configuration information corresponding to the first SLRLC bearer, configuration information of a logical channel corresponding to the first SLRLC bearer, and the first SLRLC bearer one or more of the index or identity of the first SRB, the identity or index of at least one first SRB, or the LCID corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the first terminal device and the network device. between user plane data. That is, the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the method further includes: acquiring fourth configuration information by the second terminal device; sending fourth configuration information to the first terminal device by the second terminal device, where the fourth configuration information includes: the The index or identifier carried by the first SL RLC, and the configuration information of each first SRB in the at least one first SRB, where the configuration information of the first SRB includes: PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB.
  • the first terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC and through the second terminal device.
  • the fourth configuration information only needs to include the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer, without carrying the specific configuration information of the first SL RLC bearer, which can save signaling overhead and improve resource utilization.
  • acquiring the fourth configuration information by the second terminal device includes: the second terminal device receiving the fourth configuration information sent by the network device.
  • acquiring the fourth configuration information by the second terminal device includes: the second terminal device receiving the sixth configuration information sent by the network device; and the second terminal device determining the fourth configuration information according to the sixth configuration information.
  • the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB and the index or identifier carried by the first SL RLC may be placed in the same IE, or may be placed in different IEs.
  • the fourth configuration information may be sent at one time, or may be sent through different signaling.
  • the packet data convergence protocol data unit PDCP PDU of at least one first SRB includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first SRB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • At least the first SRB includes at least one of the first SRB0, the first SRB1, the first SRB2, and the first SRB3.
  • the method further includes: the second terminal device receiving fifth configuration information sent by the first terminal device, where the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: the first SL RLC borne An index or identification, and, an identification or index of the at least one first SRB.
  • the second terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs borne by the first SL RLC. Therefore, it can be ensured that the second terminal device transmits the control signaling between the first terminal device and the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC.
  • the protocol stack of the second terminal device includes an adaptation layer, the adaptation layer is located between the radio link control RLC layer and the packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer, at least one first
  • the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU of an SRB includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first SRB corresponding to the adaptation layer PDU.
  • the first SL RLC bearer and the sidelink The second SL RLC bearer is different, the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to the second signaling radio bearer SRB (ie SL SRB), and the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the second terminal device on the second SRB .
  • the first terminal device transmits control signaling or control plane data with the second terminal device on the second SRB.
  • the first terminal device and the second The terminal device can distinguish the Uu SRB and the SL SRB on the SL between the first terminal device and the second terminal device according to different SL RLC bearers. After distinguishing the Uu SRB and the SL SRB, it can correctly distinguish the Uu SRB and the SL SRB.
  • the control signaling carried by the SL SRB ensures the accurate transmission of the control signaling and improves the data transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • a method for sidelink data packet transmission is provided, and the execution body of the method may be either a remote terminal device or a chip applied to the remote terminal device.
  • the remote terminal equipment transmits data and signaling between the relay terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • the method includes: a first terminal device (ie, a remote terminal device) acquires a data packet; the first terminal device determines that the data packet corresponds to the first signaling radio bearer SRB or the second SRB according to the indication information in the data packet, The first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the first SRB through the second terminal device (ie, the relay terminal device), and the first terminal device communicates with the second terminal on the second SRB.
  • the device transmits control signaling.
  • the control plane data carried by the Uu SRB (first SRB) and the SL SRB (second SRB) are all between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the SRB corresponding to (or belonging to) the data packet is the SL SRB or the SL SRB, so that the data packets carried by the Uu SRB and the SL SRB can be distinguished.
  • accurate transmission of data packets is ensured, and data transmission efficiency and user experience are improved.
  • both the first SRB and the second SRB correspond to the same sidelink radio link on the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second device Controls the SL RLC bearer. That is, the first SRB and the second SRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer.
  • the SL RLC bearer may also correspond to the first SRB and the second DRB (the first SRB and the second DRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer), and the second DRB can be understood as the SL DRB, the SL The DRB is used to transmit user plane data between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the SL RLC bearer may also correspond to the first DRB and the second DRB, and the second DRB may be understood as the SL DRB, and the SL DRB is used to transmit the data between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • User plane data The first DRB can be understood as a Uu DRB, and the Uu DRB is used to transmit user plane data between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • the SL RLC bearer may also correspond to the first DRB and the second SRB.
  • the first DRB can be understood as a Uu DRB, and the Uu DRB is used to transmit user plane data between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first SRB and the second SRB (the first SRB and the second SRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer); or, the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first SRB and the second DRB (the first SRB and the second DRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer); or, the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first DRB and the second DRB (the first DRB and the second DRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer) ); or, the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first DRB and the second SRB (the first DRB and the second SRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer).
  • the protocol stack of the first terminal device includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located between the radio link control RLC layer and the packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer, and the first terminal device includes an adaptation layer.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to the first signaling radio bearer SRB or the second SRB, including: the terminal device determines, according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU, the adaptation layer.
  • the configuration layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first SRB or the second SRB.
  • the first terminal device determines, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to the first signaling radio bearer SRB or the second SRB, including:
  • the first terminal device determines that the PDCP PDU corresponds to the first SRB or the second SRB according to the indication information in the packet data convergence protocol data sheet PDCP PDU.
  • the first SRB is multiple first SRBs
  • the indication information is further used to indicate: among the multiple first SRBs, the first SRB corresponding to the data packet.
  • the indication information is located in the fourth bit and/or the third bit in the first octet oct in the data packet.
  • the multiple first SRBs include at least two of the first SRB0, the first SRB1, the first SRB2, and the first SRB3.
  • a communication device comprising a unit for performing each step of any one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect to the sixth aspect, or, including a unit for performing the above
  • the unit of each step in the possible implementation manner of any one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect to the sixth aspect is a unit of each step.
  • a communication device comprising a unit for performing the above third aspect or each step in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or comprising a unit for performing the above fourth aspect or the fourth aspect A unit of various steps in any possible implementation of an aspect.
  • a communication device in a ninth aspect, includes at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor is configured to execute the method of any one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect to the sixth aspect above , or, for performing the method in the implementation manner of the possible implementation manner of any one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a tenth aspect provides a communication apparatus, the apparatus includes at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor is configured to execute the above third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or, for The method in the above fourth aspect or any possible implementation of the fourth aspect is performed.
  • a communication device in an eleventh aspect, includes at least one processor and an interface circuit, the at least one processor is configured to perform any one of the above first aspect, second aspect, fifth aspect to sixth aspect A method, or a method in an implementation manner for performing any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the fifth aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a communication device, the device includes at least one processor and an interface circuit, where the at least one processor is configured to execute the above third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or, For performing the above fourth aspect or the method in any possible implementation of the fourth aspect.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a terminal device, where the terminal device includes any one of the communication apparatuses provided in the seventh aspect, the ninth aspect, or the eleventh aspect.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a network device, and the terminal device includes any one of the communication apparatuses provided in the eighth aspect, the tenth aspect, or the twelfth aspect.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program, when executed by a processor, for performing the method in any one of the first to sixth aspects, or , for executing the method in any possible implementation manner of any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, is used to execute any one of the first to sixth aspects.
  • a seventeenth aspect provides a chip, the chip comprising: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device installed with the chip executes any one of the first to sixth aspects The method, or the method in any possible implementation manner of any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the SL in the presence of relay terminal equipment, the SL is configured on the PC5 interface on the side link for the Uu SRB or Uu DRB of the remote terminal equipment.
  • RLC bearer thereby establishing the SL RLC bearer to transmit Uu SRB or Uu DRB.
  • Using the SL RLC bearer between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment to transmit the control signaling carried by the Uu SRB or the user plane data carried by the Uu DRB can improve the transmission quality of the Uu SRB or the Uu DRB and improve the control signaling Or the efficiency of user plane data transmission.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the user plane protocol stack architecture in the PC5 interface.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the control plane protocol stack architecture of the RRC protocol on the PC5 interface.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the control plane protocol stack architecture of the PC5-S protocol in the PC5 interface.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a remote terminal device, a relay terminal device, and a network device provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of a control plane protocol stack architecture of a relay terminal device provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of a user plane protocol stack architecture of a relay terminal device provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an example of a communication system provided by the present application and applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an example of a process of establishing a communication connection between two terminal devices according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another example of a process for establishing a communication connection between two terminal devices provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an interface displayed by a terminal device provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of an adaptation layer PDU provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for signaling radio bearer configuration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for sidelink data packet transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for transmitting sidelink data packets according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a protocol stack including an adaptation layer provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of a PDCP PDU format carried by a Uu SRB provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of a PDU format carried by an SL SRB provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic block diagram of another example of the structure of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram of another example of the structure of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of another example of the structure of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are only used for descriptive purposes, and should not be construed as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features.
  • a feature defined as “first” or “second” may expressly or implicitly include one or more of that feature.
  • plural means two or more.
  • V2X device to device (device to device, D2D) communication system
  • long term evolution Long Term Evolution, LTE
  • LTE frequency division duplex Frequency division duplex
  • FDD Frequency division duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • the terminal device in this embodiment of the present application may refer to a user equipment, an access terminal, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, a user agent or user device.
  • the terminal device may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a wireless communication
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • it may be an in-vehicle module, an in-vehicle module, an in-vehicle component, an in-vehicle chip or an in-vehicle unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units, and the vehicle can use the built-in in-vehicle module, in-vehicle module, in-vehicle component, in-vehicle chip , on-board units or roadside stations, etc.
  • it may also be a terminal device in a future 5G network or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile communication network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN), etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the network device may have a device capable of providing a random access function for terminal devices or a chip that can be provided in the device, and the device includes but is not limited to: an evolved type Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WIFI) system access point (access point, AP) , wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission and reception point, TRP or transmission point, TP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR, gNB in the system, or, transmission point (TRP or TP) ), one
  • the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • This hardware layer includes hardware such as central processing unit (CPU), memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed to provide the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute a program.
  • various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer readable device, carrier or medium.
  • computer readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), card, stick or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • V2X communication is an important key technology for realizing environmental perception and information interaction in the Internet of Vehicles.
  • Other devices here can be other vehicles, other infrastructures, pedestrians, terminal devices, etc.
  • V2X communication can be regarded as a special case of device to device (D2D) communication.
  • D2D device to device
  • the communication link between different user terminal equipments may be referred to as SL.
  • PC5 interface signaling may include: Direct Communication Request/Accept, Link Identifier, Update Request/Response/Ack , Disconnect Request/Response, Link Modification Request/Accept, etc.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of the user plane protocol stack architecture in the PC5 interface.
  • the user plane protocol stack (protocol stack) on the PC5 interface includes: Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) ), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer (physics, PHY).
  • SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • media access control media access control
  • MAC media access control
  • physical layer physics, PHY
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the control plane protocol stack architecture of the RRC protocol on the PC5 interface, including a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, a MAC layer, and a PHY layer.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the control plane protocol stack architecture of the PC5-S protocol in the PC5 interface, including the PC5-S layer, the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the PHY layer is located at the lowest layer, which can also be called Layer 1.
  • the MAC layer, RLC and PDCP belong to the middle layer, which can also be called Layer 2.
  • RRC belongs to a higher layer, which may also be called Layer 3.
  • radio bearers there are two radio bearers (radio bearers, RB), one is SL data radio bearers (SL DRB), the other is SL signaling radio bearers (SL signaling radio bearers, SL SRB) ), the control plane data transmitted by the SL SRB includes the RRC signaling on the PC5 interface and the PC5-S.
  • the terminal device When a terminal device needs to transmit an SL SRB to another terminal device, the terminal device needs to establish a PDCP entity, an RLC entity and a corresponding logical channel for establishing the configuration information required by the SL SRB, such as: PDCP configuration, RLC configuration and MAC configuration, etc.
  • the terminal device When a terminal device needs to transmit an SL DRB to another terminal device, the terminal device also needs to establish a PDCP entity, an RLC entity and a corresponding logical channel for establishing the configuration information required by the SL DRB, such as: PDCP configuration, RLC configuration And MAC configuration, etc.
  • the radio bearer on the side link is transmitted on the PC5 interface through the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY.
  • the RLC bearer configuration is a low-level part of the radio bearer configuration, including RLC configuration and logical channel configuration.
  • the terminal device in addition to directly communicating with a network device (eg, a base station), the terminal device can also communicate with the base station through other terminal devices.
  • a network device e.g, a base station
  • the relay terminal device can be used as a relay for the remote terminal device, so that the remote terminal device can communicate with the base station through the relay terminal device.
  • This technology is called It is UE2NW relay technology.
  • the terminal device can pass the relay terminal device (UE-to -Network Relay UE) communicates with network devices.
  • UE-to -Network Relay UE UE-to -Network Relay UE
  • the relay terminal device may also be referred to as relay user equipment (Relay UE), and the relay terminal device may be a terminal device that provides network access for remote (Remote) terminal devices, which is implemented in this application.
  • the remote terminal equipment may also be referred to as remote user equipment (Remote UE).
  • the relay terminal equipment provides relay services for the remote terminal equipment.
  • the relay terminal equipment to provide relay services for the remote terminal equipment it can be understood that the information sent by the remote terminal equipment to the network equipment is forwarded to the network equipment through the relay terminal equipment, and the network equipment sends the information to the remote terminal equipment. The information is also forwarded to the remote terminal equipment through the relay terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a remote terminal device, a relay terminal device, and a wireless access network device.
  • the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment communicate on the side link through the PC5 interface, and are connected to the radio access network (RAN) equipment through the relay terminal equipment
  • the wireless access network device is connected to the core network device, and the core network device further communicates with the data network.
  • the relay terminal device communicates with the wireless access network device through the Uu interface.
  • the network device may also be referred to as a wireless access network device.
  • the network device or radio access network device may be a base station.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of a control plane protocol stack architecture of UE-to-Network Relay.
  • the control plane data between the remote terminal equipment and the radio access network equipment is forwarded on the RLC layer through the relay terminal equipment.
  • the PDCP layer and the RRC layer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal device are connected end-to-end between the remote terminal device and the radio access network device. That is to say, on the connection between the PDCP and RRC layers, the remote terminal equipment and the wireless access network equipment are connected end-to-end, and the PDCP layer and the RRC layer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal equipment are terminated at the wireless access network equipment.
  • the remote terminal device and the radio access network device respectively establish corresponding PDCP entities
  • the remote terminal device and the radio access network device can have corresponding end-to-end connections.
  • the RLC layer, MAC layer and PHY layer of the remote terminal equipment are end-to-end between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment, and between the relay terminal equipment and the radio access network equipment end.
  • the remote terminal equipment can communicate with Transmission of control signaling between radio access network devices.
  • the RRC message and the non-access stratum (Non-access stratum, NAS) message of the remote terminal device are transparently transmitted between the relay terminal device and the wireless access network device through the relay terminal device, that is, The relay terminal device only needs to transfer the RRC message and the NAS message without changing the RRC message and the NAS message.
  • the relay terminal equipment may also not decode RRC messages and NAS messages.
  • the PDCP layer is end-to-end between the remote terminal equipment and the wireless access network equipment on the Uu interface (that is, the Uu interface between the remote terminal equipment and the wireless access network equipment), and the relay terminal equipment is on the remote terminal equipment.
  • a PDCP protocol data unit (packet data convergence protocol data unit (PDCP PDU)) is relayed between the device and the radio access network device.
  • the relay terminal equipment may not decode the PDCP PDU, and then transmit it to the remote terminal equipment through its own PC5-RLC entity.
  • the PDCP PDU on the Uu interface is transmitted through the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY layer on the PC5 interface.
  • the wireless access network device sends control plane data (for example, configuration information, RRC message) to the first terminal device through the second terminal device may be sent using the protocol stack architecture shown in FIG.
  • the first terminal The control plane data (eg, configuration information, RRC message) sent by the radio access network device received by the device through the second terminal device may be received using the protocol stack architecture shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the protocol stacks of the remote terminal device and the relay terminal device may respectively include a relay adaptation layer (Adaptation Relay).
  • the relay adaptation layer is used to distinguish or identify the Radio Link Control Service Data Unit (Radio Link Control Service Data Unit, RLC SDU) or PDCP PDU of different remote terminal equipment.
  • the relay adaptation layer can also be used to distinguish or identify RLC SDUs or PDCP PDUs of different radio bearers of a remote terminal device.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of the user plane protocol stack architecture of UE-to-Network Relay.
  • the user plane data between the remote terminal equipment and the radio access network equipment is forwarded above the RLC layer through the relay terminal equipment of.
  • the PDCP layer and the RRC layer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal device are connected end-to-end between the remote terminal device and the radio access network device. That is to say, on the connection between the PDCP and RRC layers, the remote terminal equipment and the wireless access network equipment are connected end-to-end, and the PDCP layer and the RRC layer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal equipment are terminated on the wireless access network equipment. .
  • the remote terminal device and the radio access network device respectively establish corresponding PDCP entities
  • the remote terminal device and the radio access network device can have corresponding end-to-end connections.
  • the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY layer are end-to-end between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment, and between the relay terminal equipment and the radio access network equipment.
  • the RLC layer, MAC layer and PHY layer of the remote terminal equipment are terminated at the relay terminal equipment.
  • the PDCP PDU on the Uu interface of the remote terminal equipment is transparently transmitted between the relay terminal equipment and the wireless access network equipment through the relay terminal equipment, that is, the relay terminal equipment only needs to forward the PDCP PDU without changing the PDCP PDU. .
  • the relay terminal equipment may not decode the PDCP PDU data, and then transmit it to the remote terminal equipment through its own PC5-RLC layer.
  • the PDCP layer is end-to-end between the remote terminal equipment and the wireless access network equipment on the Uu interface, and the relay terminal equipment relays PDCP PDUs between the remote terminal equipment and the wireless access network equipment.
  • the PDCP PDU on the Uu interface is transmitted through the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY layer on the PC5 interface.
  • the DRB on the Uu interface of the remote terminal equipment is transmitted through the PDCP layer on the Uu interface and through the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY layer on the PC5 interface.
  • the data packet transmitted between the remote terminal device and the wireless access network device may also be referred to as the data packet on the Uu interface of the remote terminal device, and the data packet is transferred through the relay terminal device.
  • the user plane data sent by the wireless access network device to the first terminal device through the second terminal device may be sent using the protocol stack architecture shown in FIG. 6 , and the first terminal device receives wireless data through the second terminal device.
  • the user plane data sent by the access network device may be received using the protocol stack architecture shown in FIG. 6 .
  • SL communication refers to direct communication between two terminal devices, and the interface (or reference point) between the two terminal devices is called a PC5 interface.
  • PC5 represents an interface or a reference point between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • SL communication may also be referred to as PC5 communication.
  • the PC5-RLC bearer represents the RLC bearer on the PC5 interface between the first terminal device (remote terminal device) and the second terminal device (relay terminal device).
  • the PC5-RLC bearer can also be called the SL RLC bearer.
  • the PC5-RLC entity may also be referred to as the SL RLC entity.
  • Uu-RLC bearer is established between relay terminal equipment and wireless access network equipment
  • SL RLC bearer or PC5-RLC bearer is established between relay terminal equipment and remote terminal equipment.
  • the radio bearer on the Uu interface of the remote terminal equipment includes a DRB for transmitting user plane data and an SRB for transmitting control plane data.
  • the DRB on the Uu port of the remote terminal device can be understood as the DRB between the remote terminal device and the network device.
  • the DRB is used to carry the user plane data sent by the remote terminal device to the network device, or the network device to the remote terminal device.
  • the SRB on the Uu port of the remote terminal device can be understood as the SRB between the remote terminal device and the network device.
  • the SRB is used to carry the control signaling sent by the remote terminal device to the network device, or the network device to the remote terminal device. Control signaling sent.
  • the SRB transmitted by the remote terminal device on the Uu interface may be referred to as Uu SRB for short
  • the DRB transmitted by the remote terminal device on the Uu interface may be referred to as Uu DRB for short.
  • the SRB or DRB on the Uu interface is first transmitted to the relay terminal device through the PC5 interface, and then forwarded by the relay terminal device to the wireless access network device of.
  • the SRB or DRB on the Uu interface of the remote terminal equipment needs to be transmitted to the relay terminal equipment through the RLC layer, MAC layer and PHY layer on the PC5 interface between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment, and then It is transmitted to the wireless access network device through the relay device.
  • the radio bearer on the SL between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment also includes a DRB for transmitting user plane data and an SRB for transmitting control plane data.
  • the SRBs of the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment are called SL SRBs
  • the DRBs of the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment are called SL DRBs.
  • the SL SRB is used to carry the control signaling or control plane data sent by the remote terminal equipment to the relay terminal equipment, or the control signaling or control plane data sent by the relay terminal equipment to the remote terminal equipment.
  • the SL DRB is used to carry the user plane data sent by the remote terminal equipment to the relay terminal equipment, or the user plane data sent by the relay terminal equipment to the remote terminal equipment.
  • SL SRB or SL DRB needs to be transmitted through the RLC layer, MAC layer and PHY layer on the PC5 interface between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment.
  • the Uu RLC bearer used by the Uu SRB or Uu DRB of the remote terminal equipment can be understood as the RLC bearer on the Uu interface between the network equipment and the remote terminal equipment, but in the presence of relay terminal equipment
  • the Uu SRB or Uu DRB of the remote terminal equipment cannot be carried by the Uu RLC, that is, the remote terminal equipment and the radio access network equipment do not have a peer RLC entity on the Uu interface.
  • the remote terminal device does not establish a Uu-RLC entity in the RLC layer, so that the control signaling on the Uu SRB of the remote terminal device or the user plane data on the Uu DRB cannot be guaranteed. transmission, resulting in low efficiency of control signaling transmission or user plane data.
  • the present application provides a method for signaling radio bearer configuration or data radio bearer configuration, by configuring the SL RLC bearer on the PC5 interface on the side link for the Uu SRB or Uu DRB of the remote terminal device, thereby This SL RLC bearer is established to transport Uu SRB or Uu DRB.
  • Using the SL RLC bearer between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment to transmit the control signaling carried by the Uu SRB or the user plane data carried by the Uu DRB can improve the quality of the control signaling or user plane data, improve the control signaling Efficiency of command or user plane data transmission.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another example of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mobile communication system may include at least one radio access network device 110 and at least one terminal device (terminal devices 120 , 130 , 140 , 150 , 160 as shown in FIG. 7 ).
  • the terminal devices 130 , 150 , and 160 may be remote terminal devices, and the terminal device 130 communicates with the wireless access network device 110 through the relay terminal device 120 .
  • the terminal device 140 or the terminal device 160 communicates with the wireless access network device 110 through the relay terminal device 140 .
  • the radio access network device may be the above-mentioned network device. At least one terminal device may send uplink data or information to a radio access network device, and the radio access network device 110 may also send downlink data or information to at least one terminal device.
  • a plurality of terminal devices can also form a communication system.
  • the terminal devices 140, 150, and 160 can form a communication system, and the terminal device 140 can also send downlink data or information to the terminal devices 150 and 160. 160 may also send uplink data or information to the terminal device 140 .
  • FIG. 7 is only a schematic diagram, and the communication system may also include other network devices and/or terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of radio access network devices and terminals included in the mobile communication system.
  • the radio access network device 110 may be the above-mentioned network device.
  • the communication between the network device and the terminal device follows a certain protocol layer structure. For example, the protocol layer architecture shown in Figures 1 to 3 and Figure 5 to Figure 6.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited herein.
  • the user can click the "Settings" menu on the interface of the first terminal device, and the displayed interface is shown in Figure b in Figure 8, displaying "Search for relay devices” menu.
  • “Searching for a relay device” indicates a desire to communicate with a network device through other terminal devices. After the user opens the "search for relay device” menu, as shown in Figure c in FIG.
  • information of other terminal devices that can be used as relay devices can be displayed to the user on the interface of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can search for other devices through existing communication technologies such as wireless network communication protocols, and display information about other devices that can be used as relay devices of the first terminal device to the user.
  • the user can click on one of the other connectable devices, and after the user clicks on the terminal device (for example, the second terminal device), it means that the first terminal device determines to perform data and/or control between the second terminal device and the network device. transmission of signaling. That is, the second terminal device will act as a relay device of the first terminal device.
  • the identifiers, serial numbers or models of other devices may be displayed.
  • the serial number may be a network access license number or the like.
  • FIG. 9 it is a schematic diagram of the main interface displayed by the first terminal device.
  • the user turns on "connect relay device", which means that the user needs to connect the relay terminal device, and transmit data and/or control signaling between the relay terminal device and the network device.
  • the first terminal device can automatically search for or connect to other available terminal devices nearby.
  • the relay device is connected prompt is used to inform the user that the relay device has been connected. In this way, the user's non-sensing connection to the relay terminal device can be implemented, and the user experience can be improved.
  • the user of the second terminal device may be notified.
  • the prompt "whether to act as a relay device of the first terminal device" is displayed.
  • the user of the second terminal device clicks “OK”, which means that it is allowed to act as the relay device of the first terminal device. If they do not agree, the user can click "Cancel", and the first terminal device cannot use the second terminal device as a relay device.
  • the first terminal device may be a smart wearable device used by a user, such as a smart watch, a smart bracelet, etc.
  • the second terminal device may be: a mobile phone used by a user, a portable Computers, netbooks, PDAs and other equipment.
  • prompt information of "whether to act as a relay device of the first terminal device" may be displayed to the user.
  • the first terminal device may use: wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT) , frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication technologies to search for other devices that can be used as relay devices.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • connection rules may be set: for example, a mobile phone belonging to the same brand as the first terminal device is automatically connected, or the first terminal device The device automatically connects to the same device as the last time it was connected, that is, to achieve automatic connection.
  • the first terminal device may also automatically recommend to the user other devices that can be used as relay devices according to previous connections with other devices. equipment. For example, if the first terminal device finds after searching that other devices that can be connected to the first terminal device and can be used as relay devices are the same as the last time the user used the relay device, then the same relay as the last time is automatically connected. device, that is, to achieve automatic connection.
  • the embodiments in this application are described by taking the signaling radio bearer configuration as an example. It can be understood that the method for the RLC bearer of the Uu SRB of the remote terminal device provided in this application on the PC5 interface can also be applied to configure the remote terminal device.
  • the Uu DRB of the terminal device is carried by the RLC on the PC5 interface.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method 200 for configuring signaling radio bearers according to an embodiment of the present application. In the scenario shown in the illustration, the embodiments of the present application are not limited herein.
  • the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the network device are used as examples for executing the methods of executing the methods of the respective embodiments to describe the methods of the respective embodiments.
  • the first terminal device may be the aforementioned remote terminal device
  • the second terminal device may be the aforementioned relay terminal device
  • the network device may be the aforementioned access network device.
  • the execution body of the execution method may also be a chip applied to the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the network device.
  • the method 200 includes: S210 to S230.
  • the first terminal device receives first configuration information through the second terminal device, where the first configuration information includes or indicates a first side used for configuring the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device Information carried by the uplink radio link control SL RLC.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the SL RLC configuration information corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer the configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer, the identifier or index of at least one first SRB, at least one first SL RLC bearer.
  • the identifier or index of the DRB that is, the Uu DRB
  • the LCID is used to identify the logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, and the index or identification of the first SL RLC bearer can be understood as the index or identification of the first SL RLC bearer configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the first SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the identifier or index of the at least one first SRB can be understood as the index or identifier of the at least one first SRB configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the at least one first SRB configuration, and the SL RLC configuration information is used to establish or configure or reconfigure the RLC entity
  • the identifier or index of the at least one first DRB may be understood as an index or an identifier of the at least one first DRB configuration, and is used to indicate or identify the at least one first DRB configuration.
  • the SL RLC configuration may include: an RLC mode and corresponding parameters, and the RLC mode may include: an acknowledged mode (acknowledged mode, AM), an unacknowledged mode (unacknowledged mod, UM), and the like.
  • Corresponding parameters may include: the length of the sequence number (sequence numbers, SN) field, a timer (timer) for retransmitting poll, the maximum number of retransmissions, and the like.
  • the sidelink logical channel configuration may include: SL logical channel priority, priority bit rate, and the like.
  • the first type the first configuration information is determined and generated by the second terminal device itself, and then sent to the first terminal device.
  • the second type: the first configuration information may also be determined by a network device, and the network device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device through the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the first configuration information sent by the network device through the second terminal device.
  • the first configuration information is relayed by the second terminal device from the network device to the first terminal device.
  • the network device first sends the first configuration information to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device directly forwards it to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may not parse the first configuration information.
  • the first configuration information may be included in an RRC message sent by the network device to the first terminal device.
  • the RRC message may be relayed through the protocol stack architecture shown in FIG. 5 , that is, relayed above the RLC layer.
  • the RRC message is sent to the second terminal device through the RLC bearer between the network device and the second terminal device, and the second terminal device sends the RRC message to the second terminal device through the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the first terminal device.
  • a terminal device may also parse the first configuration information, but does not change the first configuration information. For example, after receiving the RRC message containing the first configuration information, the second terminal device parses the RRC message, and sends the RRC message to the first terminal device through the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the first terminal device .
  • the third type the first configuration information is set by the second terminal device according to the third configuration information sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and then sent to the first terminal device.
  • the network device may send the third configuration information to the second terminal device through the first signaling (for example, RRC signaling), and the second terminal device receives the signaling, parses the signaling, and then sets or determines the third configuration information according to the third configuration information. and send the first configuration information to the first terminal device by using second signaling (eg, RRC reconfiguration signaling) different from the first signaling.
  • first signaling for example, RRC signaling
  • the second terminal device is a relay terminal device of the first terminal device, and the first terminal device transmits data or control signaling between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the first configuration information in addition to receiving the first configuration information through the second terminal device, the first configuration information may also be predefined.
  • the first terminal The device may also not need to obtain the first configuration information through the second terminal device, and the first terminal device may directly determine or obtain the first configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes or indicates information for configuring a first SL RLC bearer on the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, where the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB .
  • the first SRB may be understood as a Uu SRB, and the first SRB is used to transmit control signaling between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • control signaling may also be understood as control plane data, including RRC messages and NAS messages.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the first terminal device and the network device. between user plane data. That is, the first SL RLC bearer may correspond to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer may correspond to at least one first SRB.
  • multiple SL RLC bearers may exist on the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, that is, the first terminal device and the second terminal device may be Multiple SL RLC bearers are established on the sidelink.
  • the second terminal device may send the first configuration information to the first terminal device through RRC signaling (eg, an RRC reconfiguration message RRCReconfigurationSidelink) on the PC5 interface.
  • RRC signaling eg, an RRC reconfiguration message RRCReconfigurationSidelink
  • the second terminal device forwards the RRC signaling (eg, an RRC setup (RRCSetup) message or an RRC reconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration) message) that is sent by the network device to the first terminal device and includes the first configuration information.
  • RRC signaling eg, an RRC setup (RRCSetup) message or an RRC reconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration) message
  • the first terminal device establishes the first SLRLC bearer according to the first configuration information, and the first SLRLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB.
  • the first terminal device establishes the first SLRLC bearer according to the first configuration information.
  • the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the configuration information (for example, the first configuration information) of the first SL RLC bearer may carry the identifier or index of at least one first SRB, which is used to indicate the first SL RLC bearer and the at least one first SRB bearer.
  • an identifier or an index of the first SL RLC bearer is carried in the configuration information of the at least one first SRB, which is used to indicate the correspondence between the first SL RLC bearer and the at least one first SRB.
  • a corresponding relationship between the identifier or index of at least one first SRB and the identifier and index carried by the first SL RLC is configured.
  • the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB.
  • the configuration information (for example, the first configuration information) of the first SL RLC bearer may carry the identifier or index of at least one first DRB, which is used to indicate the first SL RLC bearer and the at least one first DRB bearer.
  • the identifier or index of the first SL RLC bearer is carried in the configuration information of the at least one first DRB, which is used to indicate the correspondence between the first SL RLC bearer and the at least one first DRB.
  • the establishment of the SLRLC bearer between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may include: the first terminal device establishes an RLC entity, configures/establishes a logical channel, and the like.
  • the first terminal device establishes an RLC entity according to the SL RLC configuration information in the first configuration information.
  • the RLC entity processes RLC SDUs or RLC PDUs according to the SL RLC configuration information.
  • the first terminal device establishes a logical channel according to the logical channel configuration information and/or the logical channel identifier or index in the first configuration information.
  • the MAC entity processes the MAC SDU or MAC PDU according to the logical channel configuration information. Since the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB, the RLC entity and logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer all correspond to at least one first SRB.
  • the RLC entity and logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer both correspond to at least one first DRB.
  • At least one first SRB may be understood as at least one Uu SRB, and at least one Uu SRB may include: one or more of Uu SRB0, Uu SRB1, Uu SRB2, or Uu SRB3.
  • the first SL RLC is used to carry one Uu SRB or multiple Uu SRBs. That is to say, a corresponding first SL RLC bearer can be established for each Uu SRB separately, or the same first SL RLC bearer can also be established for multiple different Uu SRBs.
  • the first terminal device may also independently establish a corresponding first SL RLC bearer for each Uu DRB, or may also establish the same first SL for multiple different Uu DRBs. RLC bearer.
  • the second terminal device also needs to establish an SL RLC bearer corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • both the first terminal device and the second terminal device need to establish the first SL RLC bearer respectively.
  • the second terminal device may establish an RLC entity, configure/establish a logical channel, and the like according to the first configuration information.
  • the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the at least one first SRB through the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can then transmit control signaling with the network device on the at least one first SRB through the second terminal device.
  • the transmission of control signaling by the first terminal device on the first SRB with the network device through the second terminal device can be understood as: the first terminal device is on the first SRB and passes between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the PC5 interface of the device sends the control signaling to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device sends the control signaling to the network device.
  • the Uu SRB is transmitted by using the SL RLC bearer, which can ensure the normal transmission of the control signaling on the Uu SRB of the first terminal equipment, and improve the Uu SRB. Quality and efficiency of transmitted control signaling.
  • the first terminal device when the first terminal device and the second terminal device establish a first SL RLC bearer (including establishing an RLC entity and configuring a logical channel), and the first terminal device establishes a After the PDCP entity corresponding to the first DRB is obtained, the first terminal device may also transmit user plane data with the network device on at least one first DRB through the second terminal device.
  • the normal transmission of data on the Uu DRB of the first terminal device can be guaranteed, and the quality and efficiency of the user plane data transmitted by the Uu DRB can be improved.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to the first SRB of the first terminal device receives the SDU of the upper layer, and obtains the PDCP PDU through the processing of the PDCP entity .
  • the first terminal device Since in S220, the first terminal device establishes the first SL RLC bearer corresponding to the first SRB, including establishing an RLC entity, and establishing or configuring a logical channel, the first terminal device submits the PDCP PDU to the RLC corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer
  • the RLC entity obtains the RLC PDU after being processed by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity sends the RLC PDU to the second terminal device using the SL logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the second terminal device Since the second terminal device establishes the first SL RLC bearer corresponding to the first SRB, it includes establishing an RLC entity and establishing or configuring a logical channel.
  • the second terminal device can determine that the SRB corresponding to the SL logical channel is the first SRB.
  • the second terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the first terminal device on the SL logical channel, and delivers the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the second terminal device obtains the RLC SDU after being processed by the RLC entity. Since the RLC entity corresponds to the first SRB, and the first SRB is used to transmit control signaling between the first terminal device and the network device, the second terminal device passes the RLC SDU between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the RLC bearer is sent to the network device.
  • the second terminal device when the second terminal device establishes the RLC bearer with the network device, it will determine the RLC bearer between the second terminal device corresponding to the first SRB and the network device according to the configuration information, that is, to determine which SRB corresponds to the first SRB.
  • An RLC bearer For example, the network device may configure the corresponding relationship, mapping relationship or association relationship between the SRB or DRB and the RLC bearer. Therefore, when the second terminal device sends the first SRB to the network device, it will determine the corresponding RLC bearer according to the first SRB, and send the first SRB to the network device on the corresponding RLC bearer.
  • the PDCP entity of the network device receives the SDU of the upper layer, and obtains the PDCP PDU through the processing of the PDCP entity.
  • the network device determines the RLC bearer corresponding to the first SRB, and passes the PDCP PDU through The RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the network device is sent to the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may determine that the PDCP PDU on the RLC bearer corresponds to the first SRB.
  • the second terminal device After receiving the PDCP PDU, the second terminal device submits it to the RLC entity corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the first SL RLC bearer corresponding to the RLC PDU.
  • the SL logical channel sends the RLC PDU to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the second terminal device on the SL logical channel, and the first terminal device can determine that the SRB corresponding to the SL logical channel is the first SRB according to the SL logical channel on which the RLC PDU is received. .
  • the first terminal device submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, and obtains the RLC SDU after processing by the RLC entity.
  • the first terminal device determines that the RLC SDU corresponds to the first SRB, and therefore, the RLC SDU is It is handed over to the PDCP entity corresponding to the first SRB.
  • the PC5 interface between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may simultaneously need to transmit SL SRB, and Uu SRB or Uu DRB.
  • SL SRB is also carried by SL RLC. Therefore, it may be impossible to distinguish whether it is SL SRB, Uu SRB or Uu DRB transmitted on the PC5 interface. As a result, the transmission of control signaling or data may be confused.
  • control signaling carried by the Uu SRB is originally sent by the first terminal device to the network device through the second terminal device, but after the second terminal device receives the control signaling, it cannot distinguish whether the control signaling is sent to itself If the data is sent to the network device, the control signaling may not be correctly parsed, resulting in the failure of the control signaling transmission.
  • the first SL RLC bearer established by the first terminal device is different from the second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink, the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to the second SRB, and the second SRB can be understood for SL SRB.
  • the first terminal device transmits control signaling or control plane data with the second terminal device on the second SRB.
  • the method for configuring the signaling radio bearer provided by the present application, by configuring the SL RLC bearer different from the SL SRB for the Uu SRB, because the SL RLC bearer corresponding to the SL SRB (the second SRB) and the Uu SRB is different, the first terminal device and the third
  • the two terminal devices can then distinguish the Uu SRB and the SL SRB on the SL between the first terminal device and the second terminal device according to different SL RLC bearers. After distinguishing the Uu SRB and the SL SRB, the Uu SRB can be correctly distinguished. And the control signaling carried by the SL SRB, thus ensuring the accurate transmission of the control signaling and improving the data transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can distinguish the Uu DRB and the SL DRB on the SL between the first terminal device and the second terminal device according to different SL RLC bearers. After distinguishing the Uu DRB and the SL DRB, it can be correctly distinguished
  • the control signaling carried by Uu DRB and SL DRB ensures accurate data transmission and improves data transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • the implementation method is: define the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to Uu SRB0 in the standard protocol.
  • the default SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to Uu SRB1/Uu SRB2/Uu SRB3 is defined in the standard protocol.
  • the network device can also configure the SL RLC bearer configuration of Uu SRB1/Uu SRB2/Uu SRB3.
  • the SL RLC bearers corresponding to Uu SRB1, Uu SRB2 and Uu SRB3 respectively may be different RLC bearers.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited herein.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a method for configuring signaling radio bearers in some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 11 .
  • the method 200 further includes: S211.
  • the first terminal device sends second configuration information to the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • steps S210, S220, and S230 shown in FIG. 12 reference may be made to the above-mentioned related descriptions of S210, S220, and S230, which are not repeated here for brevity.
  • the first terminal device may determine the second terminal device according to the first configuration information Configuration information, where the second configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the content included in the second configuration information may be the same as the content included in the first configuration information, or the content included in the second configuration information may also be a subset of the content included in the first configuration information, or the content included in the second configuration information It is determined according to the first configuration information that is different from the first configuration information, or, part of the content included in the second configuration information may be the same as part of the content included in the first configuration information.
  • the first terminal device may send the second configuration information to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send the second configuration information to the second terminal device through RRC signaling on the PC5 interface.
  • the RRC signaling may be an RRC reconfiguration message (RRCReconfigurationSidelink).
  • the first terminal device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may also directly send the first configuration information to the second terminal device without sending the second configuration information to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send the first configuration information or the second configuration information to the second terminal device.
  • the second configuration information includes:
  • the SL RLC configuration information corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer the configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer, the identifier or index of at least one first SRB, at least one first SL RLC bearer.
  • the SLRLC configuration information and the logical channel configuration information in the first configuration information may include information specific to the transmitting end carried by the SLRLC, and information shared by the transmitting end and the receiving end.
  • the second configuration information may include information shared by the transmitting end and the receiving end carried by the SL RLC, so that after receiving the second configuration information, the second terminal device can determine the receiving end information carried by the first SL RLC.
  • the second configuration information may also include information specific to the sender carried by the SL RLC, and after receiving the second configuration information, the second terminal device may also determine the sender information carried by the first SL RLC, thereby.
  • the second terminal device may use the SLRLC to carry the control signaling sent by the transmission network to the first terminal device to the first terminal device.
  • the LCID in the second configuration information may be determined by the first terminal device according to the first configuration information, or may be determined by the first terminal device by itself, that is, the first terminal device may not need this LCID when determining the LCID.
  • first configuration information In the case that the first terminal device determines the LCID by itself, the first terminal device may also indicate the LCID to the network device. The first terminal device may further indicate to the network device that the LCID corresponds to the first SL RLC bearer or the first SRB or the first DRB.
  • the first terminal device sends indication information to the network device, where the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SL RLC bearer, or the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SRB.
  • the second terminal device indicates the LCID to the network device.
  • the second terminal device may also indicate to the network device that the LCID corresponds to the first SL RLC bearer or the first SRB or the first DRB.
  • the second terminal device sends indication information to the network device, where the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SL RLC bearer, or the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SRB.
  • the first terminal device determines the LCID according to the first configuration information
  • the LCID is determined by the network device and sent to the first terminal device through the first configuration information.
  • the SL RLC configuration information in the second configuration information may be the same as the SL RLC configuration information in the first configuration information
  • the logical channel configuration information in the second configuration information may be the same as the logical channel in the first configuration information.
  • the configuration information is the same.
  • the second configuration information may include information specific to the transmitter carried by the SL RLC, and information shared by the transmitter and the receiver.
  • the SL RLC configuration information in the second configuration information may be the same as the SL RLC configuration information in the first configuration information is different.
  • the SL RLC configuration information in the second configuration information may be used to configure the parameters of the SL RLC receiver.
  • the logical channel configuration information in the second configuration information may be different from the logical channel configuration information in the first configuration information.
  • the logical channel configuration information in the second configuration information may be used to configure the parameters of the logical channel receiving end.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a method for configuring signaling radio bearers in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the method 200 includes: S2101 , S2102 , and S220 and S230.
  • the network device sends third configuration information to the second terminal device, where the third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the second terminal device sends first configuration information to the first terminal device, where the first configuration information is determined by the second terminal device according to the third configuration information.
  • steps S220 and S230 shown in FIG. 13 reference may be made to the above-mentioned related descriptions of S220 and S230 , which are not repeated here for brevity.
  • the network device sends third configuration information to the second terminal device, where the third configuration information is used for the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the third configuration information includes: SL RLC configuration information corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, configuration information of a logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, an index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer, at least one first SL RLC bearer One or more of the identifier or index of the SRB, the identifier or index of at least one first DRB, or the LCID corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the third configuration information may be sent through RRC signaling, for example, the network device may send the third configuration information to the second terminal device through RRC setup signaling (RRCSetup) or RRC reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguation).
  • RRC setup signaling RRCSetup
  • RRCReconfiguation RRC reconfiguration signaling
  • the second terminal device sends first configuration information to the first terminal device, where the first configuration information is determined by the second terminal device according to the third configuration information.
  • the content included in the first configuration information may be the same as the content included in the third configuration information, or the content included in the first configuration information may be a subset of the content included in the third configuration information, or the first configuration information
  • the included content is different content from the third configuration information determined according to the third configuration information, or, part of the content included in the first configuration information may be the same as part of the content included in the third configuration information.
  • the LCID in the first configuration information may be determined or selected by the second terminal device itself, rather than determined according to the third configuration information, or the LCID in the first configuration information may be determined by the second terminal device according to the third configuration information. 3.
  • the configuration information is determined or selected.
  • the second terminal device may also indicate the LCID to the network device.
  • the second terminal device may also indicate to the network device that the LCID corresponds to the first SL RLC bearer or the first SRB or the first DRB.
  • the second terminal device sends indication information to the network device, where the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SL RLC bearer, or the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SRB.
  • the first terminal device After the first terminal device receives the first configuration information and determines the LCID in the first configuration information, the first terminal device indicates the LCID to the network device.
  • the first terminal device may further indicate to the network device that the LCID corresponds to the first SL RLC bearer or the first SRB or the first DRB.
  • the first terminal device sends indication information to the network device, where the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SL RLC bearer, or the indication information includes or indicates the LCID and the identifier or index of the first SRB.
  • the second terminal device determines the LCID according to the third configuration information, the LCID is determined by the network device.
  • the second terminal device may send the first configuration information to the first terminal device through RRC signaling (eg, RRCReconfiguationSidelink) on the PC5 interface.
  • RRC signaling eg, RRCReconfiguationSidelink
  • the network device may also send the information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device sends the above-mentioned third configuration information.
  • the second terminal device may not need to send the above-mentioned first configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may not need to send the above-mentioned second configuration information to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device After the first terminal device receives the first configuration information, or after the first terminal device sends a response message corresponding to the first configuration information to the network device, the first terminal device can establish the first SL RLC bearer. After the second terminal device receives the third configuration information, or after the second terminal device sends a response message corresponding to the third configuration information to the network device, the first SL RLC bearer may also be established. After the first SL RLC bearer is established between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the first terminal device can transmit control signaling with the network device on at least one first SRB through the second terminal device, or transmit control signaling on at least one first SRB. A DRB transmits user plane data with network equipment.
  • the SLRLC configuration information and the logical channel configuration information in the first configuration information may include information specific to the transmitting end carried by the SLRLC, and information shared by the transmitting end and the receiving end.
  • the first terminal device may determine the sender information and the receiver information carried by the first SL RLC through the first configuration information.
  • the SLRLC configuration information and the logical channel configuration information in the third configuration information may include information specific to the transmitting end carried by the SLRLC, and information shared by the transmitting end and the receiving end.
  • the second terminal device may determine the sender information and the receiver information carried by the first SLRLC through the third configuration information.
  • the first configuration information and the third configuration information may be the same, so that the sending end information and the receiving end information determined by the first terminal device and the second terminal device, and the receiving end information determined by the first terminal device and the second terminal device The sending end information of the device matches, and the receiving end information determined by the second terminal device matches the sending end information of the first terminal device.
  • the network device first sends the third configuration information to the second terminal device, and after confirming that the second terminal device receives the third configuration information, or receives the second terminal device After the device sends the response message corresponding to the third configuration information, the network device sends the first configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a method for configuring signaling radio bearers in some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 11 . Based on the method steps, the method 200 further includes: S221.
  • the first terminal device receives fourth configuration information through the second terminal device, where the fourth configuration information includes: configuration information of one or more first SRBs in at least one first SRB, the configuration of the first SRB
  • the information includes: at least one of PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB, an identifier of the first SRB, or an index of the first SRB.
  • the fourth configuration information includes: configuration information of one or more first DRBs in the at least one first DRB, and the configuration information of the first DRB includes: PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first DRB, At least one of an identification or an index of the first DRB.
  • steps S210 , S220 and S230 shown in FIG. 14 reference may be made to the above-mentioned related descriptions of S210 , S220 and S230 , which are not repeated here for brevity.
  • the fourth configuration information and the first configuration information are placed in the same information element (information element, IE), or, the fourth configuration information and the first configuration information are placed in different information elements, or, the fourth The configuration information and the first configuration information are placed in the same message, or the fourth configuration information and the first configuration information are placed in different messages.
  • information element information element
  • the fourth configuration information and the first configuration information are placed in different information elements, or, the fourth The configuration information and the first configuration information are placed in the same message, or the fourth configuration information and the first configuration information are placed in different messages.
  • the fourth configuration information or the configuration information of the first SRB may further include: an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC.
  • the fourth configuration information or the configuration information of the first DRB may further include: an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC.
  • the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB or the first DRB and the index or identifier carried by the first SL RLC may be placed in the same information element (information element, IE), or may be placed in different IE, the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.
  • IE information element
  • the first terminal device receives the fourth configuration information through the second terminal device, which may include the following three situations:
  • the first type the fourth configuration information is determined and generated by the second terminal device itself, and then sent to the first terminal device.
  • the second type: the fourth configuration may also be determined by the network device, and the network device sends the fourth configuration information to the first terminal device through the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the fourth configuration information sent by the network device through the second terminal device.
  • the network device first sends the fourth configuration information to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device directly forwards it to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may not parse the fourth configuration information.
  • the fourth configuration information may be included in an RRC message sent by the network device to the first terminal device.
  • the RRC message is sent to the second terminal device through the RLC bearer between the network device and the second terminal device, and the second terminal device sends the RRC message to the second terminal device through the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the first terminal device.
  • a terminal device is sent to the second terminal device through the RLC bearer between the network device and the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may also parse the fourth configuration information, but does not change the fourth configuration information. For example, after receiving the RRC message containing the fourth configuration information, the second terminal device parses the RRC message, and sends the RRC message to the first terminal device through the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the first terminal device .
  • the third type the fourth configuration information is set by the second terminal device according to other configuration information (for example, sixth configuration information) sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and then the second terminal device sends the fourth configuration information to The first terminal device.
  • the network device may send the sixth configuration information to the second terminal device through the first signaling (for example, RRC signaling), and the second terminal device receives the signaling, parses the signaling, and then sets or determines the sixth configuration information according to the sixth configuration information.
  • four configuration information, and the fourth configuration information is sent to the first terminal device by using second signaling (eg, RRC reconfiguration signaling) different from the first signaling.
  • the first terminal device After receiving the four configuration information, the first terminal device can determine the configuration information of at least one first SRB or at least one first DRB. The first terminal device may also determine, according to the fourth configuration information, which one or several first SRBs, or which one or which several first DRBs correspond to the first SL RLC bearer. In other words, it is determined that one or more first SRBs correspond to the first SL RLC bearer, or one or more first DRBs are determined to correspond to the first SL RLC bearer. That is, the first terminal device may associate the first SL RLC bearer with the at least one first SRB or the first DRB according to the fourth configuration information.
  • the fourth configuration information may also be used to notify the first terminal device which one or which the first SL RLC bearer is associated with
  • the correspondence between several first SRBs or first DRBs ensures that the first terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs or first DRBs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC and through the second terminal device.
  • the fourth configuration information only needs to include the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer without carrying the specific configuration information of the first SL RLC bearer, which can save signaling overhead and improve resource utilization.
  • the fourth configuration information may be sent at one time, or may be sent through different signaling respectively.
  • the sending of the fourth configuration information through different signaling can be understood as: one signaling includes the configuration information of one first SRB or the first DRB, and the configuration information of multiple first SRBs or multiple first DRBs needs to be sent through multiple signaling. order to be sent separately.
  • the configuration of each first SRB or each first DRB is independent, and the configuration information of each first SRB or each first DRB includes: the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB or the first DRB, the first At least one of an identifier of the SRB or the first DRB, and an index of the first SRB or the first DRB.
  • the configuration information of each first SRB or each first DRB may further include an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC.
  • the fourth configuration information may be sent through multiple signalings, and each signaling includes: PDCP configuration information corresponding to a first SRB or a first DRB. That is, the configuration information of the multiple first SRBs or the multiple first DRBs are sent separately, not together.
  • One way of sending the fourth configuration information at one time is to include in one signaling: the configuration information of multiple first SRBs or multiple first DRBs, and the configuration information of each first SRB or each first DRB includes: At least one of the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB or the first DRB, the identifier of the first SRB or the index of the first SRB, the identifier of the first DRB or the index of the first DRB. That is, the configuration information of multiple first SRBs or multiple first DRBs is sent together.
  • the signaling may further include: an index or an identifier of the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Another way to send the fourth configuration information at one time is to include in one signaling: the configuration information of multiple first SRBs or multiple first DRBs, and the configuration information of each first SRB or each first DRB includes: : at least one of the PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first SRB or the first DRB, the identifier of the first SRB or the index of the first SRB, the identifier of the first DRB or the index of the first DRB.
  • the configuration information of each first SRB or each first DRB may further include an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a method for configuring signaling radio bearers in some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 14 . Based on the method steps, the method 200 further includes: S222.
  • the first terminal device sends fifth configuration information to the second terminal device, where the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: an index or an identifier of the first SL RLC bearer, and an identifier or an index of the at least one first SRB .
  • the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC, and an identifier or an index of the at least one first DRB.
  • steps S210 , S220 , S221 , and S230 shown in FIG. 15 reference may be made to the above related descriptions of S210 , S220 , S221 , and S230 , which are not repeated here for brevity.
  • the first terminal device sends fifth configuration information to the second terminal device, and the fifth configuration information can be used by the first terminal device to associate the first SL RLC with at least one first SRB.
  • the fifth configuration information is used to notify the second terminal device which one or several first SRBs the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to relationship, it is guaranteed that the second terminal device can determine one or more first SRBs borne by the first SL RLC. Therefore, it can be ensured that the second terminal device transmits the control signaling between the first terminal device and the network device on one or more first SRBs through the first SL RLC.
  • the second terminal device receives the signaling, parses the fourth configuration information, and uses the same information as the first signaling.
  • the second signaling with different signaling for example, RRC reconfiguration signaling
  • the first terminal device may not need to send the fifth configuration information to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may also The fifth configuration information does not need to be sent to the second terminal device.
  • the execution order of S220 and S221 is not limited.
  • a situation is: after the first terminal device receives the configuration information of the first first SRB and the first configuration information , the first first SRB bearer is established. Establishing the first first SRB bearer includes the first SL RLC bearer. The first terminal device then receives the configuration information of the second first SRB, and establishes the second first SRB bearer. The second first SRB bearer also corresponds to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • S210 and S221 are also not limited. S210 may be performed first, and then S221 may be performed. Or perform S221 first, and then perform S210. Or perform S210 and S221 simultaneously.
  • each configuration information may be sent by using an RRC setup (RRCSetup) message or an RRC reconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration) message, or may also be sent by other signaling, which is not described in the embodiments of the present application. limit.
  • the fifth configuration information includes: an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC, and an identifier or index information of the at least one first DRB. .
  • the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to multiple first SRBs.
  • the fact that the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to multiple first SRBs may be understood as multiple first SRBs using the same RLC entity and the same logical channel for transmission.
  • the first SL RLC bears at least two of Uu SRB0, Uu SRB1, Uu SRB2 or Uu SRB3.
  • control signaling control plane data packets
  • the PDCP layer (PDCP layer entity) in the protocol stack of the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment can The first indication information is respectively added to the PDCP PDUs of the packet data convergence protocol data units of the multiple Uu SRBs.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate which Uu SRB the PDCP PDUs of the multiple Uu SRBs respectively correspond to (or belong to). That is, the PDCP entities of the first terminal device and the second terminal device may add and parse the first indication information in the PDCP PDU.
  • the first indication information may be included in the PDCP PDU header.
  • indication information may be included in the PDCP PDUs of Uu SRB1 and Uu SRB2 respectively, and the indication information in the PDCP PDU of Uu SRB1 is used to indicate that the PDCP PDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 , the indication information in the PDCP PDU of Uu SRB 2 is used to indicate that the PDCP PDU corresponds to Uu SRB2.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device can distinguish which Uu SRB the Uu SRB corresponding to a PDCP PDU is, so that the data packets carried by different Uu SRBs can be correctly distinguished, and the quality and efficiency of data transmission can be improved.
  • the remote terminal device wants to transmit Uu SRB1 or Uu SRB2 to the network device, if it is Uu SRB1, the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 of the remote terminal device receives the upper-layer SDU, and the PDCP entity adds indication information in the PDCP PDU to indicate is Uu SRB1. If it is Uu SRB2, the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 receives the SDU of the upper layer, and the PDCP entity adds indication information in the PDCP PDU, indicating that it is Uu SRB2.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 or the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 sends the PDCP PDU to the relay terminal device through the SL RLC bearer corresponding to Uu SRB1 and Uu SRB2.
  • the PDCP entity submits the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL RLC bearer corresponding SL logical channel to The RLC PDU is sent to the relay terminal device.
  • the relay terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the remote terminal device on the SL logical channel, submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, and obtains the RLC SDU after processing by the RLC entity.
  • the RLC SDU is sent to the network device through the RLC bearer between the relay terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device determines whether the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 or Uu SRB2 according to the indication information in the RLC SDU. Taking Uu SRB1 as an example, the network device can determine that the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1, and then submit the RLC SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1.
  • the network device submits the RLC SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 and the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 respectively, and the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 determines according to the indication information that the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 and the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 According to the indication information, it is determined that the RLC SDU does not correspond to the Uu SRB2, and the PDCP entity corresponding to the Uu SRB2 can discard the RLC SDU.
  • the network device wants to transmit Uu SRB1 or Uu SRB2 to the remote terminal device, if it is Uu SRB1, the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 of the network device receives the upper-layer SDU, and the PDCP entity adds indication information in the PDCP PDU, indicating Uu SRB1. If it is Uu SRB2, the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 receives the SDU of the upper layer, and the PDCP entity adds indication information in the PDCP PDU, indicating that it is Uu SRB2.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 or the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 sends the PDCP PDU to the relay terminal device through the RLC bearer between the network device and the relay terminal device.
  • the relay terminal device After receiving the PDCP PDU, the relay terminal device sends the PDCP PDU to the remote terminal device through the SL RLC bearer corresponding to Uu SRB1 and Uu SRB2.
  • the relay terminal device submits the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL RLC to bear the corresponding SL Logical channels send RLC PDUs to remote end devices.
  • the remote terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the relay terminal device on the SL logical channel, submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, and obtains the RLC SDU after processing by the RLC entity.
  • the indication information in the RLC SDU determines whether the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 or Uu SRB2.
  • the remote terminal device can determine that the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1, and then submit the RLC SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1. Or, the remote terminal device respectively submits the RLC SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 and the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2, and the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 determines according to the indication information that the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 and Uu SRB2 corresponds to The PDCP entity determines that the RLC SDU does not correspond to the Uu SRB2 according to the indication information, and the PDCP entity corresponding to the Uu SRB2 can discard the RLC SDU.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information may be located on one or more bits in the first octet (Oct, octet) included in the PDCP PDU, for example, located on the second bit and/or the third bit on Oct1 .
  • an adaptation layer can be added respectively.
  • the adaptation layer is located between the RLC layer and the PDCP layer.
  • the adaptation layer is used to add or parse second indication information in the PDU of the adaptation layer, where the second indication information indicates which Uu SRB the PDU of the adaptation layer corresponds to (or belongs to).
  • the PDU of the adaptation layer includes the second indication information and the SDU received by the adaptation layer from the upper layer.
  • Figure 16 shows a schematic structural diagram of an adaptation layer PDU.
  • the adaptation layer PDU includes two parts, and the bits (bits 1 to N) included in the first part are the second indication information, the bits included in the second part (bits N+1 to M) are SDUs of the adaptation layer, where N and M are both positive integers, and MN ⁇ 1.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 or the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 receives the SDU of the upper layer, and after processing by the PDCP entity, submits the PDCP PDU to the adaptation layer.
  • the adaptation layer setting indication information indicates that it is Uu SRB1.
  • the adaptation layer setting indication information indicates Uu SRB2.
  • the adaptation layer adds the indication information to the SDU received from the upper layer to form the PDU of the adaptation layer.
  • the remote terminal equipment sends the PDU of the adaptation layer to the relay terminal equipment through the SL RLC bearers corresponding to Uu SRB1 and Uu SRB2.
  • the adaptation layer submits the PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL logical channel corresponding to the SL RLC bearer to send to the relay Terminal Equipment.
  • the relay terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the remote terminal device on the SL logical channel, submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, and obtains the RLC SDU after being processed by the RLC entity.
  • the relay terminal device sends the RLC SDU to the network device through the RLC bearer between the relay terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device submits the RLC SDU to the adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer determines whether the PDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 or Uu SRB2 according to the indication information in the PDU, and then submits the SDU of the adaptation layer to The corresponding PDCP entity, after the PDCP entity processes, submits the PDCP SDU to the upper layer.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 or the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB2 receives the SDU of the upper layer, and after processing by the PDCP entity, submits the PDCP PDU to the adaptation layer.
  • the adaptation layer setting indication information indicates that it is Uu SRB1.
  • the adaptation layer setting indication information indicates that it is Uu SRB2.
  • the adaptation layer adds the indication information to the SDU received from the upper layer to form the PDU of the adaptation layer.
  • the network device sends the PDU of the adaptation layer to the relay terminal device through the RLC bearer between the network device and the relay terminal device.
  • the relay terminal device After receiving the PDU of the adaptation layer, the relay terminal device sends the PDU of the adaptation layer to the remote terminal device through the SL RLC bearer corresponding to Uu SRB1 and Uu SRB2.
  • the relay terminal device submits the PDU of the adaptation layer to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL RLC bearer
  • the corresponding SL logical channel sends the RLC PDU to the remote terminal device, and the remote terminal device can receive the RLC PDU sent by the relay terminal device on the SL logical channel.
  • the remote terminal device submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC SDU after being processed by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC SDU to the adaptation layer.
  • the adaptation layer determines according to the indication information in the RLC SDU.
  • the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 or Uu SRB2, and is processed by the adaptation layer to obtain the adaptation layer SDU, and then submits the adaptation layer SDU to the corresponding PDCP entity. After the PDCP entity processes, the PDCP SDU is submitted to the upper layer.
  • the indication information can be added to the data packet by adding an adaptation layer. It is used to indicate which Uu SRB the data packet corresponds to (or belongs to).
  • the Uu SRB corresponding to the data packet can be accurately distinguished, which can improve the quality and efficiency of data packet transmission.
  • the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to multiple first DRBs
  • the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to multiple first DRBs
  • multiple first DRBs use the same RLC entity, the same logical channel transmission.
  • the user plane data carried by multiple different Uu DRBs can also be distinguished by using the above-mentioned similar method of distinguishing control signaling carried by multiple different Uu SRBs. .
  • RRC reconfiguration message for the sending or receiving of signaling/messages/information
  • RRC setup message for example, RRC reconfiguration message (RRCReconfiguration), RRC setup message (RRCSetup), radio bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig), SL RLC bearer configuration (SL) -RLC-BearerConfig), SL RLC configuration (SL-RLC-ConfigPC5), SL logical channel configuration (SL-LogicalChannelConfig), SL media access control logical channel configuration (sl-MAC-LogicalChannelConfig) and other similar expressions, in parentheses
  • the content represents an example of the corresponding signaling/message/information IE.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a method 300 for signaling radio bearer configuration in some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17 , the method 300 includes: S310 to S340.
  • the network device sends the Uu SRB (ie the first SRB) radio bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig) information and the SL corresponding to the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device (ie the first terminal device) through the relay terminal device (ie the second terminal device)
  • the RLC ie the first SL RLC
  • the network device may send the information through an RRC message.
  • the RRC message may be an RRC setup message (RRCSetup) or an RRC reconfiguration message (RRCReconfiguration).
  • RRCSetup RRC setup message
  • RRCReconfiguration RRC reconfiguration message
  • the network device can also send the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information and the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device through other signaling through the relay terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited herein.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may include:
  • SL is the side link between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment.
  • the SL RLC configuration may include: an RLC mode and corresponding parameters, and the RLC mode may include: an acknowledged mode (acknowledged mode, AM), an unacknowledged mode (unacknowledged mod, UM), and the like.
  • Corresponding parameters may include: the length of the sequence number (sequence numbers, SN) field, a timer (timer) for retransmitting poll, the maximum number of retransmissions, and the like.
  • the sidelink logical channel configuration may include: SL logical channel priority, priority bit rate, and the like.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may also include:
  • the identification or index of the SL RLC bearer configuration the identification or index of the Uu SRB, or the LCID corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, wherein the LCID is used to identify the logical channel corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, and the index of the SL RLC bearer
  • the identifier can be understood as an index or an identifier of the SL RLC bearer configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the identifier or index of the Uu SRB can be understood as the index or identifier of the Uu SRB configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the Uu SRB configuration.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may be directly included in the RRC message, or may also be included in the cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) in the RRC message, or may also be included in the radio bearer configuration of the Uu SRB.
  • CellGroupConfig cell group configuration
  • Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information may include:
  • One or more of the PDCP configuration carried by the Uu SRB, the index of the Uu SRB radio bearer, or the identifier of the Uu SRB radio bearer is one or more of the PDCP configuration carried by the Uu SRB, the index of the Uu SRB radio bearer, or the identifier of the Uu SRB radio bearer.
  • the radio bearer configuration information may further include the identifier or index of the SL RLC bearer corresponding to the Uu SRB radio bearer.
  • the network device sends the SL RLC (that is, the first SL RLC) bearing configuration information SL RLC (that is, the first SL RLC) corresponding to the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device (that is, the first terminal device) through the relay terminal device (that is, the second terminal device).
  • RLC) bearer configuration information may refer to the relevant description of the first terminal device receiving the first configuration information through the second terminal device in S210 in the foregoing method 200.
  • SL RLC bearer configuration information reference may be made to the relevant description of the first configuration information in S210.
  • the network device sends the Uu SRB (that is, the first SRB) radio bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig) information to the remote terminal device (that is, the first terminal device) through the relay terminal device (that is, the second terminal device).
  • the first terminal device receives the relevant description of the fourth configuration information through the second terminal device.
  • the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information can also be related to the description of the fourth configuration information in S221 in the above method 200.
  • the remote terminal device selects the corresponding LCID that the SL RLC bears.
  • the LCID may be determined by the network device, and may be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration received by the remote terminal device in S310. The LCID may be used to identify the SL RLC bearer or to identify the logical channel corresponding to the SL RLC bearer.
  • the remote terminal device sends the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB to the relay terminal device.
  • the remote terminal device can send the information to the relay terminal device through an SL RRC message (RRC message on the PC5 interface between the remote terminal device and the relay terminal device).
  • the SL RRC message may be SL RRC reconfiguration information (RRC ReconfigurationSidelink message).
  • the remote terminal device to send the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB to the relay terminal device reference may be made to the description of the first terminal device sending the second configuration information to the second terminal device in S211 in the above method 200.
  • the configuration of the SL RLC bearer reference may be made to the relevant description of the second configuration information in S211 in the foregoing method 200.
  • All or part of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S330 may be determined according to the SL RLC bearer configuration in S310.
  • the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S330 may be the same as the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S310.
  • the content is the same, or a subset of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S310, or part of the content included in the SLRLC bearer configuration in S330 is the same as part of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S310.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration in S330 may include: the common (or common) SL RLC bearer configuration information (such as the length of the SN field) of the sender and the receiver on the sidelink.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration in S330 may also include the SL RLC bearer configuration information (such as the timer for retransmitting poll, the maximum number of retransmissions, etc.) required by the sender on the side link.
  • the relay terminal device can establish the same SL RLC bearer according to the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the remote terminal device may also send the index or identifier of the Uu SRB to the relay terminal device for the relay terminal device to determine the Uu SRB corresponding to the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the index or identifier of the Uu SRB may be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration, or may not be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the remote terminal device and the relay terminal device obtain the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information and the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB.
  • the relay terminal device and the remote terminal device can establish the SL RLC bearer,
  • the SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one Uu SRB.
  • the relay terminal device may send a reply message to the remote terminal device, and the reply message may be a sidelink RRC configuration complete message (RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink).
  • the remote terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer.
  • the SL RLC bearer can be established.
  • the remote terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer without waiting for a reply message from the relay terminal device after S330.
  • the remote terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer before S330.
  • the remote terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer after determining the LCID (after S320).
  • the remote terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer after S310. Therefore, it is realized that the Uu SRB is transmitted by using the SL RLC bearer, which can improve the quality of the control signaling transmitted by the Uu SRB, and improve the efficiency of the control signaling transmission.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of a method 400 for signaling radio bearer configuration in some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17 , the method 400 includes: S410 to S450.
  • the network device sends the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information to the remote terminal device through the relay terminal device.
  • the network device may send this information through an RRC message.
  • the RRC message may be an RRC setup message (RRCSetup) or an RRC reconfiguration message (RRCReconfiguration).
  • Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information may include:
  • One or more of the PDCP configuration of the Uu SRB radio bearer, the index of the Uu SRB radio bearer, or the identity of the Uu SRB radio bearer is selected from the group consisting of the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations
  • the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information may further include the identifier or index of the SL RLC bearer corresponding to the Uu SRB radio bearer.
  • the network device When the network device sends the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information to the remote terminal device through the relay terminal device, reference may be made to the relevant description of the first terminal device receiving the fourth configuration information through the second terminal device in S221 in the above method 200.
  • the configuration information of the Uu SRB radio bearer reference may be made to the relevant description of the fourth configuration information in S221 in the foregoing method 200.
  • the network device sends the SL RLC bearer configuration to the relay terminal device.
  • the network device may send the SL RLC bearer configuration to the relay terminal device through an RRC message.
  • the RRC message may be an RRC setup message (RRCSetup) or an RRC reconfiguration message (RRCReconfiguration).
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may include:
  • SL is the side link between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment.
  • the SL RLC configuration may include: RLC mode and corresponding parameters, and the RLC mode may include: AM mode and UM mode.
  • Corresponding parameters may include: the length of the SN field, a timer (timer) for retransmitting poll, the maximum number of retransmissions, and the like.
  • the sidelink logical channel configuration may include: SL logical channel priority, priority bit rate, and the like.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may also include:
  • the identifier can be understood as the index or identifier of the SL RLC bearer configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the identifier or index of the Uu SRB can be understood as the index or identifier of the Uu SRB configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the Uu SRB configuration.
  • the relay terminal device selects the SL RLC bearer corresponding to the LCID.
  • the LCID may also be determined by the network device, and may be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration received by the relay terminal device in S420.
  • the relay terminal device sends the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device.
  • the relay terminal device can send this information to the remote terminal device through an SL RRC message (RRC message on the PC5 interface between the relay terminal device and the remote terminal device).
  • All or part of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S440 may be determined according to the SL RLC bearer configuration in S420.
  • the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S440 may be the same as the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S420.
  • the content is the same, or a subset of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S420, or part of the content included in the SLRLC bearer configuration in S440 is the same as part of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S420.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration in S440 may include: the common (or common) SL RLC bearer configuration information (such as the length of the SN field) of the transmitting end and the receiving end on the sidelink.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration in S330 may also include the SL RLC bearer configuration information (such as the timer for retransmitting poll, the maximum number of retransmissions, etc.) required by the sender on the side link.
  • the relay terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment can establish the same SL RLC bearer according to the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the relay terminal device may also send the index or identifier of the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device for the remote terminal device to determine the Uu SRB corresponding to the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the index or identifier of the Uu SRB may be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration, or may not be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the relay terminal device For the relay terminal device to send the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device, reference may be made to the description of the second terminal device sending the first configuration information to the first terminal device in S2102 in the above method 200.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration information reference may be made to the relevant description of the first configuration information in S2102 in the foregoing method 200.
  • the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment obtain the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information and the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB.
  • the relay terminal equipment and the remote terminal equipment can establish the SL RLC bearer,
  • the SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one Uu SRB.
  • the remote terminal device may establish the SL RLC bearer.
  • the remote terminal device may send a reply message to the relay terminal device, and the reply message may be a sidelink RRC configuration complete message (RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink), and the relay terminal device receives the After the message, the SL RLC bearer is established.
  • the relay terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer without waiting for a reply message from the remote terminal device after S440.
  • the relay terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer before S440.
  • the relay terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer after determining the LCID (after S430).
  • the relay terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer after S420. Therefore, it is realized that the Uu SRB is transmitted by using the SL RLC bearer, which can improve the quality of the control signaling transmitted by the Uu SRB, and improve the efficiency of the control signaling transmission.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of a method 500 for signaling radio bearer configuration in some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18 , the method 500 includes: S510 to S530.
  • the network device sends the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig) information and the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device through the relay terminal device.
  • the network device may send this information through an RRC message.
  • the RRC message may be an RRC setup message (RRCSetup) or an RRC reconfiguration message (/RRCReconfiguration).
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may include:
  • SL is the side link between the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment.
  • the SL RLC configuration may include: an RLC mode and corresponding parameters, and the RLC mode may include: AM mode, UM mode, and the like.
  • Corresponding parameters may include: the length of the SN field, a timer (timer) for retransmitting poll, the maximum number of retransmissions, and the like.
  • the sidelink logical channel configuration may include: SL logical channel priority, priority bit rate, and the like.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may also include:
  • the identifier can be understood as the index or identifier of the SL RLC bearer configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the identifier or index of the Uu SRB can be understood as the index or identifier of the Uu SRB configuration, which is used to indicate or identify the Uu SRB configuration.
  • Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information may include:
  • One or more of the PDCP configuration of the Uu SRB radio bearer, the index of the Uu SRB radio bearer, or the identity of the Uu SRB radio bearer is selected from the group consisting of the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations: the following abbreviations
  • the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information may further include the identifier or index of the SL RLC bearer corresponding to the Uu SRB radio bearer.
  • the network device sends the SL RLC (that is, the first SL RLC) bearing configuration information SL RLC (that is, the first SL RLC) corresponding to the Uu SRB to the remote terminal device (that is, the first terminal device) through the relay terminal device (that is, the second terminal device).
  • RLC) bearer configuration information may refer to the relevant description of the first terminal device receiving the first configuration information through the second terminal device in S210 in the foregoing method 200.
  • SL RLC bearer configuration information reference may be made to the relevant description of the first configuration information in S210 in the foregoing method 200.
  • the network device sends the Uu SRB (that is, the first SRB) radio bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig) information to the remote terminal device (that is, the first terminal device) through the relay terminal device (that is, the second terminal device).
  • the first terminal device receives the relevant description of the fourth configuration information through the second terminal device.
  • For the configuration information of the Uu SRB radio bearer reference may be made to the relevant description of the fourth configuration information in S221 in the foregoing method 200.
  • the network device sends the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to the Uu SRB to the relay terminal device.
  • the network device may send the SL RLC bearer configuration to the relay terminal device through an RRC message.
  • the RRC message may be an RRC setup message (RRCSetup) or an RRC reconfiguration message (RRCReconfiguration).
  • All or part of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S520 may be determined according to the SL RLC bearer configuration in S510, for example, the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S520 may be the same as the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S510 The content is the same, or a subset of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S510, or part of the content included in the SRL RLC bearer configuration in S520 is the same as part of the content included in the SL RLC bearer configuration in S510.
  • the network device may also send the index or identifier of the Uu SRB to the relay terminal device for the relay terminal device to determine the Uu SRB corresponding to the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the index or identifier of the Uu SRB may be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration, or may not be included in the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the network device When the network device sends the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to the Uu SRB to the relay terminal device, reference may be made to the description of the network device in S2101 in the above method 200 sending the third configuration information to the second terminal device.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration information reference may be made to the relevant description of the third configuration information in S2101 in the foregoing method 200.
  • the remote terminal device and the relay terminal device obtain the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration information and the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB.
  • the relay terminal device and the remote terminal device can establish the SL RLC bearer,
  • the SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one Uu SRB.
  • the remote terminal device may establish a SL RLC bearer after receiving the Uu SRB radio bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig) information and the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to the Uu SRB.
  • the relay terminal device establishes the SL RLC bearer after S520.
  • the Uu SRB is transmitted by using the SL RLC bearer, which can improve the quality of the control signaling transmitted by the Uu SRB, and improve the efficiency of the control signaling transmission.
  • the SL RLC bearer in addition to the above-mentioned configuration mode of the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB, other configuration processes can also be used to establish the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited herein.
  • a possible situation is: a separate SL RLC can be configured for each Uu SRB, that is, a different SL RLC can be configured.
  • the Uu SRBs correspond to different SL RLC bearers.
  • Another possible situation is that different Uu SRBs can reuse one SL RLC bearer, that is, configure the same SL RLC bearer for different Uu SRBs, for example, at least two of Uu SRB0, Uu SRB1, Uu SRB2, and Uu SRB3 Each Uu SRB multiplexes one SL RLC bearer.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration information may only include the identifier or index of the SL RLC bearer configuration, instead of reconfiguring the specific configuration information of the SL RLC bearer configuration, so that Signaling overhead can be saved.
  • the configurations in methods 300 to 500 are all Uu SRB1 radio bearer configurations (radioBearerConfig). And Uu SRB1 and Uu SRB2 multiplex a SL RLC bearer, then when the Uu SRB2 radio bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig) and the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to Uu SRB2 are reconfigured in the methods 300 to 500, the methods 300 to 500
  • the corresponding steps can be modified to the following steps:
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration may include: the radio bearer configuration of Uu SRB1 and the index or identifier of the corresponding SL RLC bearer configuration (radioBearerConfig).
  • the remote terminal device sends the index or identifier of the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 configuration to the relay terminal device.
  • the network device sending the SL RLC bearer configuration to the relay terminal device may include: an index or an identifier of the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 configuration.
  • the relay terminal device sends the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 configuration to the remote terminal device, the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 configuration may be the index or identifier of the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 configuration .
  • the network device sends the Uu SRB2 radio bearer configuration information and the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to the Uu SRB2 to the remote terminal device.
  • the SL RLC bearer configuration information corresponding to the Uu SRB2 may be an index or an identifier of the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 configuration.
  • the network device sends the identifier or index of the Uu SRB2 radio bearer and the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 radio bearer to the relay terminal device, and the SL RLC bearer configuration corresponding to the Uu SRB2 radio bearer may be the Uu SRB2 configuration corresponding to The index or identity of the SL RLC bearer configuration.
  • the first SL RLC bears a plurality of first DRBs.
  • the specific process of the method for the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment to establish the first SL RLC bearer corresponding to the Uu DRB and the methods for establishing the first SL RLC bearer corresponding to the Uu SRB in the above-mentioned methods 300 to 500 Similarly, for similar descriptions, reference may be made to the foregoing descriptions, which are not repeated here for brevity.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sidelink data packet transmission provided by the present application.
  • the indication carried in the data packet is information, determine that the SRB corresponding to (or belong to) the data packet is SL SRB or SL SRB, so that the data packets carried by Uu SRB and SL SRB can be distinguished, thereby ensuring the accurate transmission of data packets, improving data transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • the method 600 includes: S610 and S620.
  • the first terminal device acquires the data packet.
  • the first terminal device may acquire a data packet
  • the data packet may be a control plane data packet
  • the data packet includes control signaling, for example, the data packet may be a PDCP PDU or an SDU, etc. .
  • the data packet acquired by the first terminal device may include two situations:
  • the first terminal device receives a data packet sent by the second terminal device (relay terminal device), and the data packet may be sent by the network device to the first terminal device through the second terminal device, that is, the data packet It is used to transmit control signaling between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • the data packet is generated by the second terminal device and sent to the first terminal device, that is, the data packet is used to transmit control signaling between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device acquires the data packet to be sent, and the data packet may be a data packet sent by the first terminal device to the network device through the second terminal device, or the data packet may be the first terminal device Data packets sent to the second terminal device.
  • the data packet that needs to be sent or received may include indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate that the SRB corresponding to (or belonging to) the data packet is an SL SRB or a Uu SRB.
  • the first terminal device determines, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to the first signaling radio bearer SRB or the second SRB, wherein the first terminal device uses the second terminal device to The control signaling is transmitted with the network equipment on the SRB, and the first terminal equipment is transmitted with the second terminal equipment on the second SRB.
  • the first terminal device may determine that the data packet corresponds to the first SRB or the second SRB according to the indication information in the data packet.
  • the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the first SRB through the second terminal device, and the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the second terminal device on the second SRB.
  • the first terminal device can correctly receive the data packet, or send the data packet to the second terminal device correctly, or send the data packet to the second terminal device through the second terminal device.
  • the network device sends the packet.
  • the The indication information carried in the data packet when the data packets carried by the first SRB and the second SRB are both transmitted on the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the The indication information carried in the data packet, according to the indication information, it is determined whether the data packet is a data packet carried by the first SRB or a data packet carried by the second SRB, so that the data packets carried by the first SRB and the second SRB can be distinguished, thereby ensuring that Accurate transmission of data packets to improve data transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • the data packet that the first terminal device needs to send or receive may include indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate that the data packet corresponds to (or belongs to) Uu DRB or SL DRB.
  • the first terminal device may also determine, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to or belongs to the first DRB or the second DRB (that is, the SL DRB), wherein the first terminal device passes through the data packet.
  • the second terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the first DRB, and the first terminal device transmits user plane data with the second terminal device on the second DRB.
  • the data packet to be sent or received by the first terminal device may include indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate that the data packet corresponds to (or belongs to) Uu SRB or SL DRB.
  • the first terminal device may also determine, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to or belongs to the first SRB or the second DRB (that is, the SL DRB), wherein the first terminal device passes through the data packet.
  • the second terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the first SRB, and the first terminal device transmits user plane data with the second terminal device on the second DRB.
  • the indication information in the acquired data packet is also parsed, and according to the indication information in the data packet, it is determined that the data packet corresponds to the first SRB or the second SRB.
  • the data packet obtained by the second terminal device may also include two situations:
  • the second terminal device receives a data packet sent by the first terminal device (relay terminal device), and the data packet may be sent by the first terminal device to the network device through the second terminal device, that is, the data packet It is used to transmit control signaling between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • the data packet may be sent from the first terminal device to the second terminal device, that is, the data packet is used to transmit control signaling between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may determine whether the data packet is a data packet carried by the first SRB or a data packet carried by the second SRB according to the indication information carried in the parsed data packet and according to the indication information.
  • the second terminal device obtains the data packet to be sent, and the data packet may be a data packet sent by the network device to the first terminal device through the second terminal device, or the data packet may be the second terminal device A data packet sent to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may add indication information to the data packet to indicate to the first terminal device whether the data packet is a data packet carried by the first SRB or the second SRB, and then the data packet is It is sent to the first terminal device so that the first terminal device can parse the indication information in the data packet.
  • the first SL RLC bearer is different from the second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink
  • the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to the second SRB, that is, the first SL RLC bearer
  • the SRB and the second SRB correspond to different SL RLC bearers.
  • the first SL RLC bearer is the same as the second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink
  • the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to the second SRB. That is, the first SRB and the second SRB both correspond to the same SL RLC bearer on the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second device, and the first SRB and the second SRB can multiplex the same SL RLC bearer.
  • the first SL RLC bearer is the same as the second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink
  • the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to the second DRB. That is, the first SRB and the second DRB both correspond to the same SL RLC bearer on the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second device, and the first SRB and the second DRB can multiplex the same SL RLC bearer, the second DRB can be understood as SL DRB.
  • the SL RLC bearer may also correspond to the first DRB and the second DRB, and the second DRB may be understood as the SL DRB, and the SL DRB is used to transmit the first terminal User plane data between the device and the second terminal device.
  • the first DRB can be understood as a Uu DRB, and the Uu DRB is used to transmit user plane data between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • the SL RLC bearer may also correspond to the first DRB and the second SRB.
  • the first DRB can be understood as a Uu DRB, and the Uu DRB is used to transmit user plane data between the first terminal device and the network device.
  • the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first SRB and the second SRB (the first SRB and the second SRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer); or, the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first SRB and the second DRB (the first SRB and the second DRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer); or, the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first DRB and the second DRB (the first DRB and the second DRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer) ); or, the SL RLC bearer corresponds to the first DRB and the second SRB (the first DRB and the second SRB multiplex the same SL RLC bearer).
  • the protocol stacks of the first terminal device and the second terminal device may include an adaptation layer (Adapation), where the adaptation layer is located between the RLC layer and the PDCP layer.
  • the adaptation layer is used to add or parse the indication information in the PDU of the adaptation layer, the indication information indicates that the PDU of the adaptation layer corresponds to (or belongs to) the first SRB or the second SRB, and the PDU of the adaptation layer includes the indication SDUs received by the information and adaptation layers from higher layers.
  • the structure of the PDU of the adaptation layer may be as shown in FIG. 16 .
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting sidelink data packets in some embodiments of the present application.
  • the method step S620 shown in FIG. 20 may include S621 .
  • the terminal device determines that the adaptation layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first SRB or the second SRB according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU.
  • step S620 shown in FIG. 21 reference may be made to the above-mentioned related description of S620, which is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the remote terminal device ie the first terminal device
  • the relay An adaptation layer (Adapation) is respectively added to the protocol stack of the terminal device (the second terminal device).
  • the adaptation layer (the entity corresponding to the adaptation layer) is used to add or parse indication information in the data packet (such as PDCP PDU or RLC SDU), and the indication information is used to indicate whether the data packet corresponds to (or belongs to) Uu SRB or for SL SRB.
  • the adaptation layer may be located between the RLC layer and the PDCP layer.
  • the solid arrows in FIG. 22 are used to indicate SL SRB transmission, and the dashed arrows are used to indicate Uu SRB transmission.
  • the remote terminal device and the relay terminal device may also determine that the adaptation layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first SRB or the second DRB according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU.
  • the remote terminal device and the relay terminal device may also determine that the adaptation layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first DRB or the second DRB according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU.
  • a possible implementation is: when a Uu SRB and an SL SRB use the same SL RLC bearer, for example, Uu SRB1 and an SL SRB1 multiplex one SL RLC bearer, and Uu SRB2 and one SL SRB2 multiplex another SL RLC bearer.
  • the adaptation layer can add indication information in the data packet, and the length of the indication information can be 1 bit, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the data packet corresponds to a Uu SRB or an SL SRB. For example, if the value of the bit of the indication information is set to 1, indicating that the data packet corresponds to Uu SRB, then the relay terminal equipment, after receiving the data packet, parses the indication information and determines that the data packet needs to be sent to Internet equipment.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 or the PDCP entity corresponding to SL SRB receives the upper-layer SDU, and passes through the PDCP entity. After processing, the PDCP PDU is submitted to the adaptation layer. If it is a PDU of the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1, the adaptation layer setting indication information indicates Uu SRB1. If it is the PDU of the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB, the adaptation layer setting indication information indicates the SL SRB.
  • the adaptation layer adds the indication information to the SDU received from the upper layer to form the PDU of the adaptation layer.
  • the remote terminal device sends the PDU of the adaptation layer to the relay terminal device through the SL RLC bearer corresponding to Uu SRB1 and SL SRB.
  • the adaptation layer of the remote terminal equipment submits the PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL RLC bearer corresponding to the RLC PDU.
  • the SL logical channel is sent to the relay terminal equipment.
  • the relay terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the remote terminal device on the SL logical channel, submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC SDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC SDU
  • the adaptation layer determines whether the PDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 or SL SRB according to the indication information in the PDU. If the PDU corresponds to Uu SRB1, the relay terminal device sends the adaptation layer SDU to the network device through the RLC bearer between the relay terminal device and the network device. If the PDU corresponds to the SL SRB, the relay terminal device submits the adaptation layer SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to the Uu SRB1 of the network device receives the upper-layer SDU, and after processing by the PDCP entity , send the PDCP PDU to the relay terminal device through the RLC bearer between the network device and the relay terminal device.
  • the relay terminal device submits the PDCP PDU to the adaptation layer.
  • the adaptation layer setting indication information is indicated as Uu SRB1, and the PDCP PDU is added to the indication information to form an adaptation layer PDU.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB of the relay terminal device receives the SDU of the upper layer, and after processing by the PDCP entity, submits the PDCP PDU to the adaptation layer.
  • the indication information of the adaptation layer setting is indicated as SL SRB, and the PDCP PDU is added to the indication information to form the PDU of the adaptation layer.
  • the relay terminal device sends the PDU of the adaptation layer to the remote terminal device through the SL RLC bearer corresponding to Uu SRB1 and SL SRB.
  • the relay terminal device submits the PDU of the adaptation layer to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL RLC bearer
  • the corresponding SL logical channel sends the RLC PDU to the remote terminal device, and the remote terminal device can receive the RLC PDU sent by the relay terminal device on the SL logical channel.
  • the remote terminal device submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC SDU after being processed by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC SDU to the adaptation layer.
  • the adaptation layer determines according to the indication information in the RLC SDU.
  • the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 or SL SRB.
  • the adaptation layer SDU is obtained after processing by the adaptation layer, and then the SDU of the adaptation layer is submitted to the corresponding PDCP entity. After the PDCP entity processes, the PDCP SDU is submitted to the upper layer.
  • Another possible implementation is: when multiple different Uu SRBs and one SL SRB use the same SL RLC bearer, for example, Uu SRB1, Uu SRB2 and one SL SRB1 multiplex one SL RLC bearer, or, Uu SRB1 SRB0, Uu SRB2, Uu SRB3 and one SL SRB1 multiplex one SL RLC bearer.
  • the length of the indication information added by the adaptation layer in the data packet (eg PDCP PDU or RLC SDU) may be greater than or equal to 2 bits.
  • the indication information is used to indicate: whether the data packet corresponds to a Uu SRB or an SL SRB, and in the case of indicating that the data packet corresponds to a Uu SRB, further indicate which Uu SRB the data packet corresponds to, in other words , the indication information can indicate which SRB the SRB corresponding to the data packet is the multiple Uu SRBs and one SL SRB.
  • the adaptation layer can add 2-bit indication information to the data packet, and can pre-define or configure different SRBs with different values for the indication information.
  • the corresponding relationship between, for example, the 2-bit indication bit is "00" to indicate that the data packet corresponds to the SL SRB, and the 2-bit indication bit is "10" to indicate that the data packet corresponds to Uu SRB1, 2 bits
  • the indication bit is "11" to indicate that the data packet corresponds to Uu SRB2.
  • the first bit in the 2-bit indication bits is used to indicate whether the data packet corresponds to the SL SRB or the Uu SRB, and when it is determined that the first bit indicates that the data packet corresponds to the Uu SRB, Further read the second bit, the second bit is used to indicate whether the Uu SRB is Uu SRB1 or Uu SRB2.
  • the indication information may be defined by some bits (for example, existing reserved bits) included in the data packet itself to indicate the SRB corresponding to the data packet.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited herein.
  • the data packets respectively include
  • the indication information can be different.
  • the indication information in these two cases may be located in different fields in the data packet, and may have different lengths, and so on.
  • the remote terminal Devices and relay terminal devices may use one or more bits in a data packet (eg, PDCP PDU or RLC SDU) to indicate whether the data packet corresponds to (or belongs to) a Uu SRB or an SL SRB.
  • a data packet eg, PDCP PDU or RLC SDU
  • the PDCP layer entities of the remote terminal equipment and the relay terminal equipment can respectively use one or more bits in the header of the PDCP PDU as indication information to indicate whether the data packet corresponds to a Uu SRB or an SL SRB, Or parse the indication. It should be understood that since the data packet carried by the Uu SRB0 does not pass through the PDCP layer, a different RLC bearer from the SL SRB can be configured for the Uu SRB0.
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of the format of the PDCP PDU carried by the Uu SRB in the prior art
  • Fig. 24 is a schematic diagram of the PDU format carried by the SL SRB in the prior art.
  • R represents reserved Bit
  • an octet (Oct, octet) in the figure represents a byte (byte) composed of 8 bits (bits)
  • the fourth bit in Oct 1 is R. Therefore, the fourth bit in Oct 1 can be used to indicate whether the PDU corresponds to a Uu SRB or an SL SRB.
  • a possible implementation is: when a Uu SRB and an SL SRB use the same SL RLC bearer, the PDCP layer can use the fourth bit in Oct 1 to indicate whether the data packet corresponds to a Uu SRB or an SL SRB,
  • the correspondence between different values of the indication information and the Uu SRB and the SL SRB may be predefined or preconfigured. For example, the value of the 4th bit in Oct1 is 1, indicating that the data packet corresponds to the Uu SRB, and when the value of the 4th bit in Oct1 is 0, it indicates that the data packet corresponds to the SL SRB.
  • the remote terminal device When the remote terminal device needs to transmit Uu SRB1 to the network device, or the remote terminal device needs to transmit SL SRB to the relay terminal device, if it is Uu SRB1, the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 of the remote terminal device receives the upper-layer SDU, The PDCP entity sets the indication information in the PDCP PDU to indicate Uu SRB1. If it is an SL SRB, the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB receives the SDU of the upper layer, and the PDCP entity sets the indication information in the PDCP PDU to indicate the SL SRB.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 or the PDCP entity corresponding to SL SRB sends the PDCP PDU to the relay terminal device through the SL RLC bearer corresponding to Uu SRB1 and SL SRB.
  • the PDCP entity submits the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL RLC bearer corresponding SL logical channel to The RLC PDU is sent to the relay terminal device.
  • the relay terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the remote terminal device on the SL logical channel, submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, and obtains the RLC SDU after processing by the RLC entity.
  • the indication information in the RLC SDU (for example, the 4th bit in Oct 1), when it is determined that the indication information indicates the Uu SRB, the RLC SDU is sent to the network device.
  • the indication information indicates the SL SRB, it is handed over to the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB.
  • the RLC entity submits the RLC SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB, and the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB determines whether the indication is the SL SRB according to the indication information in the RLC SDU, and if not, discards the RLC SDU, and if so, The RLC SDU is then processed.
  • the relay terminal device also sends the RLC SDU to the network device.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to the Uu SRB of the network device determines whether the indicated Uu SRB is indicated according to the indication information in the RLC SDU. If not, the RLC SDU is discarded, and if so, the RLC SDU is processed.
  • the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 of the network device receives the upper-layer SDU, the PDCP entity sets the indication information in the PDCP PDU to indicate Uu SRB1, and then the network device passes the PDCP PDU through The RLC bearer between the network device and the relay terminal device is sent to the relay terminal device.
  • the relay terminal device needs to send the SL SRB to the remote terminal device, the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB of the relay terminal device receives the upper-layer SDU, and the PDCP entity sets the indication information in the PDCP PDU to indicate the SL SRB.
  • the relay terminal device sends the PDCP PDU to the remote terminal device through the SL RLC bearer corresponding to Uu SRB1 and SL SRB. Specifically, the relay terminal device submits the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, obtains the RLC PDU after processing by the RLC entity, and submits the RLC PDU to the MAC entity, and the MAC entity uses the SL RLC to bear the corresponding SL Logical channels send RLC PDUs to remote end devices.
  • the remote terminal device receives the RLC PDU sent by the relay terminal device on the SL logical channel, submits the RLC PDU to the RLC entity corresponding to the SL RLC bearer, and obtains the RLC SDU after processing by the RLC entity.
  • the indication information in the RLC SDU determines whether the RLC SDU corresponds to the Uu SRB1 or the SL SRB. Taking Uu SRB1 as an example, the remote terminal device can determine that the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1, and then submit the RLC SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1.
  • the remote terminal device submits the RLC SDU to the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 and the PDCP entity corresponding to SL SRB respectively, and the PDCP entity corresponding to Uu SRB1 determines according to the indication information that the RLC SDU corresponds to Uu SRB1 and the corresponding SL SRB.
  • the PDCP entity determines that the RLC SDU does not correspond to the Uu SRB1 according to the indication information, and the PDCP entity corresponding to the SL SRB can discard the RLC SDU.
  • the length of the indication information can be multiple bits, which is used to indicate whether the data packet corresponds to a Uu SRB or an SL SRB, and to indicate which Uu SRB it is.
  • the correspondence between different SRBs and different values of the indication information may also be pre-defined or configured.
  • the combination of the 4th bit and the 3rd bit in Oct 1 can be used as the indication information.
  • the 2-bit indication bit is "00" to indicate that the data packet corresponds to SL SRB
  • the 2-bit indication bit is "01" to indicate that the data packet corresponds to Uu SRB1
  • the 2-bit indication bit is "10" Used to indicate that the packet corresponds to Uu SRB2.
  • the protocol layer such as the PDCP entity corresponding to the PDCP layer
  • the implementation is relatively simple, the complexity is low, and the utilization rate of logical channel resources can be further improved.
  • the first SRB and the second SRB corresponding to the same SL RLC bearer may be predefined. For example, it is defined in a standard protocol that the first SRB and the second SRB correspond to the same SL RLC bearer/the same LCID. For example, define Uu SRB0 and SL SRB0 to correspond to the same SL RLC bearer/same LCID, or, Uu SRB1 and SL SRB1 to correspond to the same SL RLC bearer/same LCID, or, Uu SRB2 and SL SRB2 to correspond to the same SL RLC bearer /same LCID.
  • the standard protocol specifies that the first SRB corresponds to the first SL RLC bearer/first LCID, and specifies that the second SRB also corresponds to the first SL RLC bearer/first LCID.
  • Uu SRB0 is specified to correspond to the first SL RLC bearer/first LCID
  • SL SRB0 is specified to also correspond to the first SL RLC bearer/first LCID.
  • the first SRB and the second SRB corresponding to the same SL RLC bearer may also be configured by the network.
  • the network configures the first SRB and the second SRB to correspond to the same SL RLC bearer/same LCID.
  • the configuration information of the first SRB includes the identifier or index of the second SRB.
  • the network configures the first SRB to correspond to the first SL RLC bearer/first LCID, and configures the second SRB to also correspond to the first SL RLC bearer/first LCID.
  • the method for configuring the first SL RLC bearer and the first SRB in the network may use the method in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the SRB or DRB transmitted between the first terminal device and the network device is also transmitted through the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device may configure the corresponding relationship, mapping relationship or association relationship between the SRB or DRB and the RLC bearer.
  • the network device sends information to the second terminal device, where the information includes or indicates the identifier or index of the first SRB and the corresponding identifier or index of the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device sends information to the second terminal device, where the information includes or indicates the identifier or index of the first SRB and the corresponding logical channel identifier between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device may also configure the RLC bearer (the first SL RLC bearer) between the first terminal device and the second terminal device corresponding to the SRB or DRB, and the correspondence between the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the network device or Mapping relationship or association relationship.
  • the network device sends information to the second terminal device, the information includes or indicates the identifier or index of the first SL RLC bearer, and the corresponding identifier or index of the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device sends information to the second terminal device, where the information includes or indicates the identifier or index of the first SLRLC bearer, and the corresponding logical channel identifier between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device sends information to the second terminal device, where the information includes or indicates the logical channel identifier corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, and the corresponding identifier or index of the RLC bearer between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • the network device sends information to the second terminal device, where the information includes or indicates a logical channel identifier corresponding to the first SLRLC bearer, and a corresponding logical channel identifier between the second terminal device and the network device.
  • pre-set and pre-defined may be pre-saved in a device (for example, including a terminal and a network device), a corresponding code, a table, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information
  • a device for example, including a terminal and a network device
  • a corresponding code for example, including a terminal and a network device
  • a table for example, a table, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information
  • FIG. 25 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 700 may correspond to the first terminal equipment (remote terminal equipment) described in the foregoing methods 200 to 500, or may be a chip or component applied to the first terminal equipment, and, Each module or unit in the communication apparatus 700 is respectively configured to perform each action or processing process performed by the first terminal device in the above-mentioned methods 200 to 500 .
  • the communication device 700 includes a transceiver unit 710 and a processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiving unit 710 is used to perform specific signal transceiving under the driving of the processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiver unit 710 is configured to receive first configuration information through the second terminal device, where the first configuration information includes or indicates a first side link used to configure the side link between the communication apparatus and the second terminal device Information carried by the link radio link control SL RLC;
  • the processing unit 720 is configured to establish the first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information, where the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB;
  • the transceiver unit 710 is further configured to transmit control signaling with the network device on the at least one first SRB through the second terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus can be carried by the first SL RLC, so that control signaling can be transmitted with the network equipment on at least one first SRB through the second terminal equipment. It is realized that on the side link between the second terminal equipment of the communication device, the Uu SRB is transmitted by using the SL RLC bearer, which can ensure the normal transmission of the control signaling on the Uu SRB of the communication device, and improve the control signaling of the Uu SRB transmission. order quality and efficiency.
  • the first SL RLC bearer is different from the second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink, and the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to the second signaling radio bearer SRB, the The communication apparatus transmits control signaling with the second terminal equipment on the second SRB.
  • the first configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears the corresponding SL RLC configuration information, the first SL RLC bears the corresponding logical channel configuration information, the first SL RLC bearer's index or identity, the at least one first SRB's identity or index, or The first SL RLC bears one or more of the corresponding logical channel identifiers LCID.
  • the transceiver unit 710 is further configured to send second configuration information to the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • the second configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears a corresponding logical channel identifier LCID, and the LCID is used to identify the corresponding logical channel of the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the first configuration information is determined by the second terminal device according to third configuration information, and the third configuration information is sent by the network device to the second terminal device, The third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • the transceiver unit 710 is further configured to receive fourth configuration information through the second terminal device, where the fourth configuration includes each first SRB in the at least one first SRB
  • the configuration information of the first SRB includes: the PDCP configuration information of the packet data convergence protocol corresponding to the first SRB, and the index or identifier carried by the first SL RLC.
  • the transceiver unit 710 is further configured to send fifth configuration information to the second terminal device, where the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: the index of the first SL RLC bearer or an identification, and, an identification or index of the at least one first SRB.
  • the packet data convergence protocol data unit PDCP PDU of the at least one first SRB includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the first SRB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • the protocol stack of the communication device includes an adaptation layer
  • the adaptation layer is located between the radio link control RLC layer and the packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer
  • the at least one first The adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU of an SRB includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first SRB corresponding to the adaptation layer PDU.
  • At least the first SRB includes at least one of the first SRB0, the first SRB1, the first SRB2, and the first SRB3.
  • the first configuration information is determined by a network device.
  • the network device sends the first configuration information to the communication apparatus through the second terminal device.
  • the first configuration information is first sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and then forwarded by the second terminal device to the communication apparatus. That is, the communication apparatus receives the first configuration information sent by the network device through the second terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 700 includes a transceiver unit 710 and a processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiving unit 710 is used to perform specific signal transceiving under the driving of the processing unit 720 .
  • the processing unit 720 is configured to acquire first configuration information, where the first configuration information is predefined, and the first configuration information includes or indicates a configuration for the first terminal device and the second terminal device (ie, the relay terminal device) The information carried by the first sidelink radio link on the sidelink between the SL RLCs; the processing unit 720 is further configured to establish a first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information, and the first SL RLC bearer Corresponding to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB; the first terminal device transmits control signaling with the network device on the at least one first SRB through the second terminal device.
  • the first SL RLC bearer may also correspond to at least one first DRB, the first DRB may be understood as a Uu DRB, and the first DRB is used to transmit the first terminal device and the network device. between user plane data. That is, the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first DRB, or the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first SRB.
  • the communication apparatus 700 may correspond to the first terminal device (remote terminal device) described in the foregoing method 600, or may be a chip or component applied to the first terminal device, and the communication Each module or unit in the apparatus 700 is respectively configured to perform each action or processing process performed by the first terminal device in each embodiment of the foregoing method 600 .
  • the communication device 700 includes a transceiver unit 710 and a processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiving unit 710 is used to perform specific signal transceiving under the driving of the processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiver unit 710 is used to acquire data packets
  • the processing unit 720 is configured to determine, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to the first signaling radio bearer SRB or the second SRB, wherein the communication device is on the first SRB through the second terminal device
  • the control signaling is transmitted with the network equipment, and the communication apparatus transmits the control signaling with the second terminal equipment on the second SRB.
  • the communication device provided by the present application, when the data packets carried by the first SRB and the second SRB are both transmitted on the sidelink between the communication device and the second terminal equipment, by parsing the indication information carried in the data packets, According to the indication information, it is determined whether the data packet is carried by the first SRB or the data packet carried by the second SRB, so that the data packets carried by the first SRB and the second SRB can be distinguished, thereby ensuring the accurate transmission of the data packet and improving the data Transmission efficiency and user experience.
  • both the first SRB and the second SRB correspond to the same sidelink radio link control on the sidelink between the communication apparatus and the second device.
  • SL RLC bearer
  • the protocol stack of the communication device includes an adaptation layer
  • the adaptation layer is located between the radio link control RLC layer and the packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer, the processing unit, It is also used for determining that the adaptation layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first SRB or the second SRB according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU.
  • the processing unit 720 is further configured to determine that the PDCP PDU corresponds to the first SRB or the second SRB according to the indication information in the PDCP PDU of the Packet Data Convergence Protocol data sheet.
  • the first SRB is a plurality of first SRBs
  • the indication information is further used to indicate: among the plurality of first SRBs, the first SRB corresponding to the data packet.
  • the indication information is located in the fourth bit and/or the third bit in the first octet oct in the data packet.
  • the multiple first SRBs include at least two of the first SRB0 , the first SRB1 , the first SRB2 , and the first SRB3 .
  • the communication apparatus 700 may correspond to the second terminal equipment (relay terminal equipment) described in the foregoing methods 200 to 500, or may be a chip or component applied to the second terminal equipment,
  • each module or unit in the communication apparatus 700 is respectively configured to perform each action or processing process performed by the second terminal device in each of the above-mentioned embodiments of the method 200 to the method 500 .
  • the communication device 700 includes a transceiver unit 710 and a processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiving unit 710 is used to perform specific signal transceiving under the driving of the processing unit 720 .
  • a processing unit 720 configured to acquire first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes or indicates a first side on a sidelink between the first terminal device (remote terminal device) and the communication apparatus for configuring The information of the uplink radio link control SL RLC bearer; the processing unit 720 is further configured to establish the first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information, and the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first signaling radio bearer SRB.
  • the transceiver unit 710 is configured to receive the first configuration information sent by the network device, and optionally, the transceiver unit 710 is further configured to directly forward the first configuration information to the first configuration information.
  • the processing unit 720 does not parse the first configuration information; the transceiver unit 710 is further configured to receive second configuration information sent by the first terminal device, where the second configuration information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • the transceiver unit 710 is configured to receive third configuration information sent by the network device; the processing unit 720 is further configured to determine the first configuration information according to the third configuration information, and the third configuration information.
  • the configuration information is used for the second terminal device to establish the first SLRLC bearer; the transceiver unit 710 is further configured to send the first configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 710 is configured to receive third configuration information sent by the network device, where the third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer, and the third configuration information The information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • the communication apparatus 700 may correspond to the network equipment described in the foregoing methods 200 to 500, or may be a chip or component applied to the network equipment, and each module in the communication apparatus 700 or The units are respectively configured to execute each action or processing procedure performed by the network device in each of the foregoing embodiments of the method 200 to the method 500 .
  • the communication device 700 includes a transceiver unit 710 and a processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiving unit 710 is used to perform specific signal transceiving under the driving of the processing unit 720 .
  • the communication device 700 may also be the storage unit, and the transceiver unit 710 may be a transceiver, an input/output interface or an interface circuit.
  • the storage unit is used to store the instructions executed by the transceiver unit 710 and the processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiver unit 710 , the processing unit 720 and the storage unit are coupled to each other, the storage unit stores instructions, the processing unit 720 is used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit, and the transceiver unit 710 is used to perform specific signal transmission and reception under the drive of the processing unit 720 .
  • the transceiver unit 710 may include a receiving unit (module) and a sending unit (module), which are configured to perform the foregoing methods 200 to 600 and the first steps in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 11 to 15 and FIGS. 17 to 21 .
  • a terminal device (remote terminal device) receives and transmits information.
  • the transceiver unit 710 may be a transceiver, an input/output interface or an interface circuit.
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the processing unit 720 may be implemented by a processor.
  • the communication apparatus 800 may include a processor 810 , a memory 820 , a transceiver 830 and a bus system 840 .
  • Various components of the communication device 800 are coupled together through a bus system 840, where the bus system 840 may include a power bus, a control bus, a status signal bus, and the like in addition to a data bus.
  • the various buses are labeled as bus system 840 in FIG. 25 . For convenience of representation, only a schematic drawing is shown in FIG. 26 .
  • the communication apparatus 700 shown in FIG. 25 or the communication apparatus 800 shown in FIG. 26 can implement the steps performed by the first terminal equipment (remote terminal equipment) in each of the foregoing embodiments of the methods provided in this application. Similar descriptions can refer to the descriptions in the aforementioned corresponding methods. In order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the communication apparatus 700 shown in FIG. 25 or the communication apparatus 800 shown in FIG. 26 may be a terminal device.
  • each unit in the above communication apparatus can all be implemented in the form of software calling through the processing element; also can all be implemented in the form of hardware; some units can also be implemented in the form of software calling through the processing element, and some units can be implemented in the form of hardware.
  • each unit can be a separately established processing element, or can be integrated in a certain chip of the device to be implemented, and can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, which can be called by a certain processing element of the device and execute the unit's processing.
  • the processing element may also be called a processor, which may be an integrated circuit with signal processing capability.
  • each step of the above method or each of the above units may be implemented by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or implemented in the form of software being invoked by the processing element.
  • a unit in any of the above communication devices may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, eg, one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or, a or more digital signal processors (DSPs), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • a unit in the apparatus can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler
  • the processing element can be a general-purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU) or other processors that can invoke programs.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 900 provided by this application.
  • the above-mentioned communication apparatus 700 or 800 may be configured in the terminal device 900 .
  • the communication apparatus 700 or 800 itself may be the terminal device 900 .
  • the terminal device 900 may perform the actions performed by the first terminal device in the foregoing methods 200 to 600 .
  • FIG. 27 only shows the main components of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 900 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs, for example, for supporting the terminal device to execute the above-mentioned transmission precoding matrix instruction method embodiment. the described action.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, such as the codebook described in the above embodiments.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • the control circuit together with the antenna can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 27 only shows one memory and one processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data.
  • the processor in FIG. 27 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as a bus.
  • a terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, a terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capability, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • an antenna and a control circuit with a transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit 901 of the terminal device 900
  • a processor with a processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 902 of the terminal device 900
  • the terminal device 900 includes a transceiver unit 901 and a processing unit 902 .
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, or the like.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 901 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 901 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 501 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, and the like
  • the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, or the like.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), dedicated integrated Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • enhanced SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Fetch memory
  • direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination.
  • the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored on or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted over a wire from a website site, computer, server or data center (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like containing a set of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • This embodiment also provides a computer storage medium, where computer instructions are stored in the computer storage medium, and when the computer instructions are executed on the communication device, the communication device executes the above-mentioned related method steps to realize the wireless signaling in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • This embodiment also provides a computer program product, when the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer program product causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned relevant steps, so as to realize the method for configuring the signaling radio bearer and the sidelink data in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the method of packet transmission when the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer program product causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned relevant steps, so as to realize the method for configuring the signaling radio bearer and the sidelink data in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide an apparatus, which may specifically be a chip, a component or a module, and the apparatus may include a connected processor and a memory; wherein, the memory is used for storing computer execution instructions, and when the apparatus runs , the processor can execute the computer execution instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip executes the signaling radio bearer configuration method and the sidelink data packet transmission method in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device, computer storage medium, computer program product or chip provided in this embodiment are all used to execute the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, reference may be made to the corresponding provided above. The beneficial effects in the method will not be repeated here.
  • Embodiment 1 A method for radio bearer configuration, the method includes:
  • the first terminal device receives first configuration information through the second terminal device, where the first configuration information includes or indicates a first side used for configuring the sidelink between the first terminal device and the second terminal device Information carried by the uplink radio link control SL RLC;
  • the first terminal device establishes the first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information, and the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first radio bearer RB;
  • the first terminal device transmits control signaling or data with the network device on the at least one first RB through the second terminal device.
  • Embodiment 2 The method for configuring a radio bearer according to Embodiment 1, wherein the first SL RLC bearer is different from the second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink, and the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to A second radio bearer RB, and the first terminal device transmits control signaling or data with the second terminal device on the second RB.
  • Embodiment 3 The method for radio bearer configuration according to Embodiment 1 or Embodiment 2, wherein the first configuration information includes:
  • the SL RLC configuration information corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer the configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, the index or identification of the first SL RLC bearer, the identification of the at least one first RB or an index, or one or more of the logical channel identifiers LCIDs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 4 The method for configuring a radio bearer according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, the method for configuring a radio bearer further includes:
  • the first terminal device sends second configuration information to the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • Embodiment 5 The method for radio bearer configuration according to Embodiment 4, wherein the second configuration information includes:
  • the first SL RLC bears a corresponding logical channel identifier LCID, and the LCID is used to identify the corresponding logical channel of the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 6 The method for configuring a radio bearer according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the first configuration information is determined by the second terminal device according to the third configuration information, and the The third configuration information is sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and the third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 7 The method for configuring a radio bearer according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 6, the method for configuring a radio bearer further includes:
  • the first terminal device receives fourth configuration information through the second terminal device, where the fourth configuration includes configuration information of each first RB in the at least one first RB, and the configuration information of the first RB It includes: the PDCP configuration information of the packet data convergence protocol corresponding to the first RB, and the index or identifier of the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 8 The method for configuring a radio bearer according to Embodiment 7, the method for configuring a radio bearer further includes:
  • the first terminal device sends fifth configuration information to the second terminal device, where the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: an index or an identifier carried by the first SL RLC, and the at least one first RB identifier or index.
  • Embodiment 9 The method for configuring a radio bearer according to Embodiment 7 or Embodiment 8, wherein the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Data Unit PDCP PDU of the at least one first RB includes first indication information, and the first indication The information is used to indicate the first RB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Data Unit PDCP PDU of the at least one first RB includes first indication information, and the first indication The information is used to indicate the first RB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • Embodiment 10 The method for configuring a radio bearer according to Embodiment 7 or Embodiment 8, wherein the protocol stack of the first terminal device includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located at the radio link control RLC layer and the PDCP layer of the Packet Data Convergence Protocol, the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU of the at least one first RB includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication corresponding to the adaptation layer PDU. a RB.
  • Embodiment 11 The method for radio bearer configuration according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 10, wherein at least the first RB includes a first RB0, a first RB1, a first RB2, and a first RB3. at least one.
  • Embodiment 12 The method for radio bearer configuration according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 11, wherein the RB is a signaling radio bearer SRB or a data radio bearer DRB.
  • Embodiment 13 A method for sidelink data packet transmission, the method comprising:
  • the first terminal device obtains the data packet
  • the first terminal device determines, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to the first radio bearer RB or the second RB, wherein the first terminal device uses the second terminal device in the
  • the first RB transmits control signaling or data with the network device, and the first terminal device transmits control signaling or data with the second terminal device on the second RB.
  • Embodiment 14 The method for transmitting sidelink data packets according to Embodiment 13, wherein both the first RB and the second RB correspond to the distance between the first terminal device and the second device The same sidelink radio link control SL RLC bearer on the sidelink.
  • Embodiment 15 The method for sidelink data packet transmission according to Embodiment 13 or Embodiment 14, wherein the protocol stack of the first terminal device includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located in the wireless link. Between the RLC layer and the PDCP layer of the packet data convergence protocol, the first terminal device determines that the data packet corresponds to the first radio bearer RB or the second RB according to the indication information in the data packet, including:
  • the terminal device determines that the adaptation layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first RB or the second RB according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU.
  • Embodiment 16 The method for transmitting sidelink data packets according to Embodiment 13 or Embodiment 14, wherein the first terminal device determines that the data packet corresponds to the first terminal device according to the indication information in the data packet.
  • a radio bearer RB or a second RB including:
  • the first terminal device determines that the PDCP PDU corresponds to the first RB or the second RB according to the indication information in the packet data convergence protocol data sheet PDCP PDU.
  • Embodiment 17 The method for transmitting sidelink data packets according to any one of Embodiment 13 to Embodiment 16, wherein the first RB is a plurality of first RBs, and the indication information is further used In the indication: among the plurality of first RBs, the first RB corresponding to the data packet.
  • Embodiment 18 The method for sidelink data packet transmission according to any one of Embodiments 13 to 17, wherein the indication information is located in the first octet of the data packet The fourth and/or third bit in the oct.
  • Embodiment 19 The method for sidelink data packet transmission according to Embodiment 17, wherein the multiple first RBs include at least two of the first RB0, the first RB1, the first RB2, and the first RB3.
  • Embodiment 20 The method for sidelink data packet transmission according to any one of Embodiments 13 to 19, wherein the RB is a signaling radio bearer SRB or a data radio bearer DRB.
  • Embodiment 21 a communication device, the communication device includes: a processing unit and a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive first configuration information through a second terminal device, where the first configuration information includes or indicates a first configuration information used to configure a sidelink between the communication apparatus and the second terminal device.
  • the processing unit configured to establish the first SL RLC bearer according to the first configuration information, where the first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first radio bearer RB;
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to transmit control signaling or data with the network device on the at least one first RB through the second terminal device.
  • Embodiment 22 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 21, wherein the first SL RLC bearer is different from a second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink, and the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to a second wireless An RB is carried, and the communication apparatus transmits control signaling or data with the second terminal device on the second RB.
  • Embodiment 23 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 21 or Embodiment 22, wherein the first configuration information includes:
  • the SL RLC configuration information corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer the configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, the index or identification of the first SL RLC bearer, the identification of the at least one first RB or an index, or one or more of the logical channel identifiers LCID corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 24 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 21 to Embodiment 23, the transceiver unit is further configured to send second configuration information to the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • Embodiment 25 The communication apparatus of Embodiment 24, wherein the second configuration information comprises:
  • the first SL RLC bears a corresponding logical channel identifier LCID, and the LCID is used to identify the corresponding logical channel of the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 26 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 21 to 25, wherein the first configuration information is determined by the second terminal device according to third configuration information, and the third The configuration information is sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and the third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 27 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 21 to 26, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive fourth configuration information through the second terminal device, where the fourth configuration includes The configuration information of each first RB in the at least one first RB, the configuration information of the first RB includes: the packet data convergence protocol PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first RB, and the first SL RLC bearer index or identifier.
  • Embodiment 28 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 27, the transceiver unit is further configured to send fifth configuration information to the second terminal device, where the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: the first SL The index or identifier carried by the RLC, and the identifier or index of the at least one first RB.
  • Embodiment 29 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 27 or Embodiment 28, wherein the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Data Unit PDCP PDU of the at least one first RB includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used for Indicates the first RB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Data Unit PDCP PDU of the at least one first RB includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used for Indicates the first RB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • Embodiment 30 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 27 or Embodiment 28, wherein a protocol stack of the communication apparatus includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located at the Radio Link Control RLC layer and the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Between PDCP layers, the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU of the at least one first RB includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first RB corresponding to the adaptation layer PDU.
  • Embodiment 31 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 21 to 30, wherein at least the first RB includes at least one of a first RB0, a first RB1, a first RB2, and a first RB3.
  • Embodiment 32 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 21 to 31, wherein the RB is a signaling radio bearer SRB or a data radio bearer DRB.
  • Embodiment 33 a communication device, the communication device includes: a processing unit and a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver unit for acquiring data packets
  • the processing unit is configured to determine, according to the indication information in the data packet, that the data packet corresponds to the first radio bearer RB or the second RB, wherein the communication device uses the second terminal.
  • the communication device transmits control signaling or data with the network device on one RB, and the communication device transmits the control signaling or data with the second terminal device on the second RB.
  • Embodiment 34 The communication apparatus of Embodiment 33, wherein the first RB and the second RB both correspond to the same side on a sidelink between the communication apparatus and the second device Downlink Radio Link Control SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 35 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 33 or Embodiment 34, wherein a protocol stack of the communication apparatus includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located at the Radio Link Control RLC layer and the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Between the PDCP layers, the processing unit is further configured to determine that the adaptation layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first RB or the second RB according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU.
  • Embodiment 36 According to the communication device according to Embodiment 33 or Embodiment 34, the processing unit is further configured to determine that the PDCP PDU corresponds to the first PDCP PDU according to the indication information in the Packet Data Convergence Protocol data sheet PDCP PDU. RB or the second RB.
  • Embodiment 37 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 33 to Embodiment 36, wherein the first RB is a plurality of first RBs, and the indication information is further used to indicate that: Among the first RBs, the first RB corresponding to the data packet.
  • Embodiment 38 The communication apparatus of any one of Embodiments 33 to 37, wherein the indication information is located in the fourth bit in the first octet oct in the data packet and / or the third bit.
  • Embodiment 39 The communication apparatus of Embodiment 37, wherein the plurality of first RBs include at least two of a first RB0, a first RB1, a first RB2, and a first RB3.
  • Embodiment 40 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 33 to 39, wherein the RB is a signaling radio bearer SRB or a data radio bearer DRB.
  • Embodiment 41 A communication device, the communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system-on-chip in the terminal, the communication device includes: a processor and a memory, the memory stores an instruction, and when the instruction is executed by the processor, the communication device is executed. Perform the following steps:
  • First configuration information is received by the second terminal equipment, the first configuration information includes or indicates a first sidelink radio link used to configure the sidelink between the communication apparatus and the second terminal equipment Control the information carried by the SL RLC;
  • first SL RLC bearer corresponds to at least one first radio bearer RB;
  • the control signaling data is transmitted with the network device on the at least one first RB through the second terminal device.
  • Embodiment 42 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 41, wherein the first SL RLC bearer is different from a second SL RLC bearer on the sidelink, and the second SL RLC bearer corresponds to a second wireless An RB is carried, and the communication apparatus transmits control signaling or data with the second terminal device on the second RB.
  • Embodiment 43 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 41 or Embodiment 42, wherein the first configuration information includes:
  • the SL RLC configuration information corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer the configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer, the index or identification of the first SL RLC bearer, the identification of the at least one first RB or an index, or one or more of the logical channel identifiers LCIDs corresponding to the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 44 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 41 to Embodiment 43, the communication apparatus further performs the following step: sending second configuration information to the second terminal device, the second configuration The information is determined according to the first configuration information.
  • Embodiment 45 The communication apparatus of Embodiment 44, wherein the second configuration information comprises:
  • the first SL RLC bears a corresponding logical channel identifier LCID, and the LCID is used to identify the corresponding logical channel of the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 46 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 41 to 45, wherein the first configuration information is determined by the second terminal device according to third configuration information, and the third The configuration information is sent by the network device to the second terminal device, and the third configuration information is used by the second terminal device to establish the first SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 47 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 41 to 46, the communication apparatus further performs the following step: receiving fourth configuration information through the second terminal device, the fourth configuration Including the configuration information of each first RB in the at least one first RB, the configuration information of the first RB includes: the packet data convergence protocol PDCP configuration information corresponding to the first RB, and the first SL RLC The index or identifier of the bearer.
  • Embodiment 48 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 47, the communication apparatus further performs the following step: sending fifth configuration information to the second terminal device, where the fifth configuration information includes or indicates: the first SL The index or identifier carried by the RLC, and the identifier or index of the at least one first RB.
  • Embodiment 49 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 47 or Embodiment 48, wherein the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Data Unit PDCP PDU of the at least one first RB includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used for Indicates the first RB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Data Unit PDCP PDU of the at least one first RB includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used for Indicates the first RB corresponding to the PDCP PDU.
  • Embodiment 50 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 48 or Embodiment 49, wherein a protocol stack of the communication apparatus includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located at the Radio Link Control RLC layer and the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Between PDCP layers, the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU of the at least one first RB includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first RB corresponding to the adaptation layer PDU.
  • Embodiment 51 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 41 to 50, wherein at least the first RB includes at least one of a first RB0, a first RB1, a first RB2, and a first RB3.
  • Embodiment 52 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 41 to 51, wherein the RB is a signaling radio bearer SRB or a data radio bearer DRB.
  • Embodiment 53 A communication device, the communication device may be a terminal or a chip or a system-on-chip in the terminal, the communication device includes: a processor and a memory, the memory stores an instruction, and when the instruction is executed by the processor, the communication device is executed. Perform the following steps:
  • the communication apparatus transmits with the network device on the first RB through the second terminal device Control signaling or data, the communication apparatus transmits control signaling or data with the second terminal equipment on the second RB.
  • Embodiment 54 The communication apparatus of Embodiment 53, wherein the first RB and the second RB both correspond to the same side on a sidelink between the communication apparatus and the second device Downlink Radio Link Control SL RLC bearer.
  • Embodiment 55 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 53 or Embodiment 54, wherein a protocol stack of the communication apparatus includes an adaptation layer, and the adaptation layer is located at the Radio Link Control RLC layer and the Packet Data Convergence Protocol Between the PDCP layers, the communication apparatus further performs the following step: according to the indication information in the adaptation layer protocol data unit PDU, it is determined that the adaptation layer protocol PDU corresponds to the first RB or the second RB.
  • Embodiment 56 The communication apparatus according to Embodiment 54 or Embodiment 55, the communication apparatus further performs the following step: according to the indication information in the Packet Data Convergence Protocol data sheet PDCP PDU, determine that the PDCP PDU corresponds to the first an RB or the second RB.
  • Embodiment 57 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 53 to Embodiment 56, wherein the first RB is a plurality of first RBs, and the indication information is further used to indicate that: Among the first RBs, the first RB corresponding to the data packet.
  • Embodiment 58 The communication apparatus of any one of Embodiments 53 to 57, wherein the indication information is located in the fourth bit in the first octet oct in the data packet and / or the third bit.
  • Embodiment 59 The communication apparatus of Embodiment 57, wherein the plurality of first RBs include at least two of a first RB0, a first RB1, a first RB2, and a first RB3.
  • Embodiment 60 The communication apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 53 to 59, wherein the RB is a signaling radio bearer SRB or a data radio bearer DRB.
  • Embodiment 61 A computer program product, when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method involved in any of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 12.
  • Embodiment 62 A computer program product, when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method involved in any of the foregoing Embodiments 13 to 20.
  • Embodiment 63 A computer-readable storage medium, where instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, the computer can execute the steps involved in any of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 12. method.
  • Embodiment 64 A computer-readable storage medium, where instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, the computer can execute any of the above-mentioned Embodiments 13 to 20. method.
  • Embodiment 65 A chip includes a processor, and when the processor executes an instruction, the processor is configured to execute the method involved in any of the foregoing Embodiments 1 to 12.
  • the instruction can come from the memory inside the chip or from the memory outside the chip.
  • the chip further includes an input and output circuit.
  • Embodiment 66 A chip includes a processor, and when the processor executes an instruction, the processor is configured to execute the method involved in any of the foregoing Embodiments 13 to 20.
  • the instruction can come from memory inside the chip or from memory outside the chip.
  • the chip further includes an input and output circuit.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or May be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • Units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed in multiple different places. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a stand-alone product, may be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • a readable storage medium including several instructions to make a device (which may be a single chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置，该方法包括：远端终端设备通过中继终端设备接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一SL RLC承载的信息；远端终端设备根据该第一配置信息，建立第一SL RLC承载，第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB；远端终端设备通过中继终端设备在至少一个第一SRB（Uu SRB）上与网络设备传输控制信令。本申请提供的方法，通过为远端终端设备的Uu SRB在侧行链路上建立SL RLC承载，利用SL RLC承载来传输该Uu SRB承载的控制信令，提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量和效率。

Description

侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2020年7月24日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202010724475.0、申请名称为“侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，更为具体的，涉及一种侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置。
背景技术
车辆对其他设备(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信是车联网中实现环境感知、信息交互的重要关键技术。不同用户终端设备之间的通信链路可以称之为侧行链路(sidelink,SL)。车辆与其他实体(entity)的通信(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)可以使用侧行链路进行。V2X通信可以看成是设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信的一种特殊情形。不同终端设备之间的通信链路可以称之为SL。例如，车辆到车辆之间的通信链路可以为SL。
在SL中，当某一个终端设备不在网络设备的覆盖范围内时，该终端设备可以通过中继终端设备的中继从而与网络设备进行通信。但是，目前并没有定义终端设备如何通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间传输控制信令，这样会造成控制信令传输的质量无法保证，导致控制信令传输的效率较低。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置，通过为远端终端设备的Uu SRB在侧行链路上PC5接口上配置SL RLC承载，从而建立该SL RLC承载来传输Uu SRB。利用远端终端设备与中继终端设备之间的SL RLC承载来传输该Uu SRB承载的控制信令，可以提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量，提高控制信令传输的效率。
第一方面，提供了一种侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法，该方法的执行主体既可以是远端终端设备也可以是应用于远端终端设备的芯片。远端终端设备通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间传输数据和信令。该方法包括：第一终端设备(即远端终端设备)通过第二终端设备(即中继终端设备)接收第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；该第一终端设备根据该第一配置信息，建立该第一SL RLC承载，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB；该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备在该至少一个第一SRB(即至少一个Uu SRB)上与网络设备传输控制信令。
第二方面，提供了一种侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法，该方法的执行主体既可以是远端终端设备也可以是应用于远端终端设备的芯片。远端终端设备通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间传输数据和信令。该方法包括：第一终端设备(即远端终端设备)获取第一配置信息，该第一配置信息是预先定义的，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备和第二终端设备(即中继终端设备)之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；第一终端设备根据第一配置信息，建立第一SL RLC承载，第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB；第一终端设备通过第二终端设备在至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。
第一方面或者第二方面提供的侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法，通过第一终端设备建立和第二终端设备之间第一SL RLC承载，第一终端设备可以通过该第二终端设备在至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。从而实现了第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上，利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以保障第一终端设备的Uu SRB上的控制信令的正常传输，提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量和效率。
在本申请实施例中，远端终端设备Uu接口上的无线承载包括用于传输用户面的数据的DRB和用于传输控制面数据的SRB。远端终端设备的Uu DRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的DRB，远端终端设备的Uu SRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的SRB。该Uu SRB需要先通过PC5接口传输至中继终端设备，进而由中继终端设备转发给无线接入网设备的。
在本申请实施例中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。也就是说：该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一SL RLC承载与该侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，该第二SL RLC承载对应第二信令无线承载SRB(即SL SRB)，该第一终端设备在该第二SRB上与该第二终端设备传输控制信令。第一终端设备在该第二SRB上与第二终端设备传输控制信令或者控制面数据。在该实现方式中，通过为Uu SRB配置与SL SRB不同的SL RLC承载，由于SL SRB(第二SRB)和Uu SRB(第一SRB)对应的SL RLC承载不同，第一终端设备和第二终端设备便可以根据不同的SL RLC承载，区分在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的SL上的Uu SRB和SL SRB，在区分Uu SRB和SL SRB之后，便可以正确区分Uu SRB和SL SRB承载的控制信令，从而保证了控制信令的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，第一配置信息，包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在Uu SRB配置与SL SRB为不同的SL RLC承载的情况下，或者，在Uu SRB配置与SL SRB为相同的SL RLC承载的情况下，一种可能的实现方式为：在标准协议中定义Uu SRB0对应的SL RLC承载配置。在标准协议中定义Uu SRB1/Uu SRB2/Uu SRB3对应的默认的SL RLC承载配置。网络设备还可以配置Uu SRB1/Uu  SRB2/Uu SRB3的SL RLC承载配置。应理解，Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2和Uu SRB3分别对应的SL RLC承载可以为不同的RLC承载。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一配置信息是网络设备确定的。网络设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息。例如，该第一配置信息是网络设备先发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备转发给第一终端设备。即第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一终端设备向该第二终端设备发送第二配置信息，该第二配置信息是根据该第一配置信息确定的。例如，在该第一配置信息是网络设备先发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备直接转发给第一终端设备的情况下，第一终端设备可以根据第一配置信息，确定第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于第二终端设备建立第一SL RLC承载。
可选的，第二配置信息包括的内容可以和第一配置信息包括的内容相同，或者，第二配置信息包括的内容也可以是第一配置信息包括的内容的子集，或者，第二配置信息包括的内容是根据第一配置信息确定的与第一配置信息不同的内容，或者，第二配置信息包括的部分内容可以和第一配置信息包括的部分内容相同。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第二配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID，该LCID用于标识该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道。或者，用于标识第一SL RLC承载。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一配置信息是该第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的，该第三配置信息为该网络设备发送给该第二终端设备的，该第三配置信息用于该第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载，或者，用于该第二终端设备建立与该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC承载。
可选的，第三配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、该至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，该第四配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，以及至少一个第一SRB中每一个第一SRB的配置信息，该第一SRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息。在该实现方式中，保证了第一终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载对应的一个或者多个第一SRB。从而可以保障第一终端设备通过第一SL RLC，通过第二终端设备在一个或者多个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。并且，第四配置信息中只需要包括第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，而不用携带第一SL RLC承载的具体配置信息，可以节省信令开销，提高资源的利用率。
可选的，该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息和第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识可以放置在同一个IE中，或者，也可以在放置在不同的IE中。
第四配置信息可以一次性发送，也可以分别通过不同的信令发送。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一终端设 备向该第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，该第五配置信息包括或指示：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，和，至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引。在该实现方式中，保证了第二终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载的一个或者多个第一SRB。从而可以保障第二终端设备通过第一SL RLC，在一个或者多个第一SRB上传输第一终端设备与网络设备之间的控制信令。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，至少一个第一SRB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该PDCP PDU对应的第一SRB。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一终端设备的协议栈中包括适配层，该适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，至少一个第一SRB的适配层协议数据单元PDU中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该适配层PDU对应的第一SRB。
在第一方面或者第二方面一种可能的实现方式中，其特征在于，至少第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少一个。
第三方面，提供了一种信令无线承载配置的方法，该方法的执行主体既可以是网络设备也可以是应用于网络设备的芯片。其中，远端终端设备通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间传输数据和信令。该方法包括：网络设备通过第二终端设备(即中继终端设备)向第一终端设备(即远端终端设备)发送第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB；该网络设备通过第二终端设备在该至少一个第一SRB(即至少一个Uu SRB)上与第一终端设备传输控制信令。
第三方面提供的信令无线承载配置的方法，通过配置第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的第一SL RLC承载的配置信息，第一终端设备可以建立和第二终端设备之间第一SL RLC承载，从而实现了第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上，利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以保障第一终端设备的Uu SRB上的控制信令的正常传输，提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量和效率。
在本申请实施例中，远端终端设备Uu接口上的无线承载包括用于传输用户面的数据的DRB和用于传输控制面数据的SRB。远端终端设备的Uu DRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的DRB，远端终端设备的Uu SRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的SRB。该Uu SRB或Uu DRB需要先通过PC5接口传输至中继终端设备，进而由中继终端设备转发给网络设备的。
在第三方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。即该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
在第三方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：
网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三配置信息，该第三配置信息用于该第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第一配置信息，包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第三配置信息包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。即该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
在第三方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：网络设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四配置信息。例如，网络设备先将第四配置信息发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备直接转发给第一终端设备。或者，网络设备先将第六配置信息发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备根据第六配置信息确定第四配置信息，并将第四配置信息发送给第一终端设备。
该第四配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，以及至少一个第一SRB中每一个第一SRB的配置信息，该第一SRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息。在该实现方式中，保证了第一终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载对应的一个或者多个第一SRB。从而可以保障第一终端设备通过第一SL RLC，通过第二终端设备在一个或者多个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。并且，第四配置信息中只需要包括第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，而不用携带第一SL RLC承载的具体配置信息，可以节省信令开销，提高资源的利用率。
可选的，该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息和第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识可以放置在同一个IE中，或者，也可以在放置在不同的IE中。
第四配置信息可以一次性发送，也可以分别通过不同的信令发送。
在第三方面一种可能的实现方式中，至少一个第一SRB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该PDCP PDU对应的第一SRB。
在第三方面一种可能的实现方式中，至少第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少一个。
在第三方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：
网络设备接收第一终端设备或第二终端设备发送的第七配置信息，该第七配置信息包括或指示第一SL RLC承载或所述第一SRB对应的LCID。
可选的，该第七配置信息还可以包括或指示所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或标识，或者，该第七配置信息还可以包括或指示所述第一SRB的索引或标识。
第四方面，提供了一种信令无线承载配置的方法，该方法的执行主体既可以是网络设备也可以是应用于网络设备的芯片。其中，远端终端设备通过中继终端设备与网 络设备之间传输数据和信令。该方法包括：网络设备向第二终端设备(即中继终端设备)发送第三配置信息，该第三配置信息包括或指示用于配置第一终端设备和该第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB；该网络设备通过第二终端设备在该至少一个第一SRB(即至少一个Uu SRB)上与第一终端设备传输控制信令。
第四方面提供的信令无线承载配置的方法，通过配置第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的第一SL RLC承载的配置信息，第二终端设备可以建立和第一终端设备之间第一SL RLC承载，从而实现了第二终端设备和第一终端设备之间的侧行链路上，利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以保障第一终端设备的Uu SRB上的控制信令的正常传输，提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量和效率。
在本申请实施例中，远端终端设备Uu接口上的无线承载包括用于传输用户面的数据的DRB和用于传输控制面数据的SRB。远端终端设备的Uu DRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的DRB，远端终端设备的Uu SRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的SRB。该Uu SRB或Uu DRB需要先通过PC5接口传输至中继终端设备，进而由中继终端设备转发给网络设备的。
在第四方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。即该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
在第四方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：
网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息，该第一配置信息用于该第一终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载。网络设备可以通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第一配置信息，包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第三配置信息包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。即该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
在第四方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：网络设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四配置信息。例如，网络设备先将第四配置信息发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备直接转发给第一终端设备。或者，网络设备先将第六配置信息发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备根据第六配置信息确定第四配置信息，并将第四配置 信息发送给第一终端设备。
该第四配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，以及至少一个第一SRB中每一个第一SRB的配置信息，该第一SRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息。在该实现方式中，保证了第一终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载对应的一个或者多个第一SRB。从而可以保障第一终端设备通过第一SL RLC，通过第二终端设备在一个或者多个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。并且，第四配置信息中只需要包括第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，而不用携带第一SL RLC承载的具体配置信息，可以节省信令开销，提高资源的利用率。
可选的，该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息和第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识可以放置在同一个IE中，或者，也可以在放置在不同的IE中。
第四配置信息可以一次性发送，也可以分别通过不同的信令发送。
在第四方面一种可能的实现方式中，至少一个第一SRB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该PDCP PDU对应的第一SRB。
在第四方面一种可能的实现方式中，至少第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少一个。
在第四方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：
网络设备接收第一终端设备或第二终端设备发送的第七配置信息，该第七配置信息包括或指示所述第一SL RLC承载或所述第一SRB对应的LCID。
可选的，该第七配置信息还可以包括或指示所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或标识，或者，该第七配置信息还可以包括或指示所述第一SRB的索引或标识。
第五方面，提供了一种信令无线承载配置的方法，该方法的执行主体既可以是第二终端设备(即中继终端设备)也可以是应用于第二终端设备的芯片。其中，远端终端设备通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间传输数据和信令。该方法包括：第二终端设备获取第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备(远端终端设备)和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；该第二终端设备根据该第一配置信息，建立该第一SL RLC承载，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB。
第五方面提供的侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法，通过第一终端设备建立和第二终端设备之间第一SL RLC承载，第一终端设备可以通过该第二终端设备在至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。从而实现了第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上，利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以保障第一终端设备的Uu SRB上的控制信令的正常传输，提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量和效率。
在本申请实施例中，远端终端设备Uu接口上的无线承载包括用于传输用户面的数据的DRB和用于传输控制面数据的SRB。远端终端设备的Uu DRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的DRB，远端终端设备的Uu SRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的SRB。该Uu SRB需要先通过PC5接口传输至中继终端设备，进而由中继终端设备转发给网络设备的。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端获取第一配置信息，包括：
第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息，第二终端设备不对该第一配置信息进行解析；该方法还包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送该第一配置信息；第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二配置信息，该第二配置信息是根据该第一配置信息确定的。
可选的，第二配置信息包括的内容可以和第一配置信息包括的内容相同，或者，第二配置信息包括的内容也可以是第一配置信息包括的内容的子集，或者，第二配置信息包括的内容是根据第一配置信息确定的与第一配置信息不同的内容，或者，第二配置信息包括的部分内容可以和第一配置信息包括的部分内容相同。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备获取第一配置信息，包括：
第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第三配置信息；第二终端设备根据第三配置信息，确定第一配置信息，第三配置信息用于该第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载，该方法还包括：第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端设备获取第一配置信息，包括：
第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息，第二终端设备不对该第一配置信息进行解析；该方法还包括：
第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息；
第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第三配置信息，第三配置信息用于第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载，第三配置信息是根据第一配置信息确定的。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第一配置信息是第二终端设备自己确定并生成的。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第一配置信息，包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第三配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。即该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：第二终端设备获取第四配置信息；第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四配置信息，该第四配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，以及至少一个第一SRB中每一个第一SRB的配置信息，该第一SRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息。在该实现方式中，保证了第一终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载对应的一个或者多个第一SRB。从而可以保障第一终端设备通过第一SL RLC，通过第二终端设备在一个或者多个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。并且，第四配置信息中只需要包括第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，而不用携带第一SL RLC承载的具体配置信息，可以节省信令开 销，提高资源的利用率。
可选的，第二终端设备获取第四配置信息，包括：第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第四配置信息。
可选的，第二终端设备获取第四配置信息，包括：第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第六配置信息；第二终端设备根据该第六配置信息，确定第四配置信息。
可选的，该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息和第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识可以放置在同一个IE中，或者，也可以在放置在不同的IE中。
第四配置信息可以一次性发送，也可以分别通过不同的信令发送。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，至少一个第一SRB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该PDCP PDU对应的第一SRB。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，至少第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少一个。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第二终端设备接收第一终端设备发送的第五配置信息，该第五配置信息包括或指示：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，和，至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引。在该实现方式中，保证了第二终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载的一个或者多个第一SRB。从而可以保障第二终端设备通过第一SL RLC，在一个或者多个第一SRB上传输第一终端设备与网络设备之间的控制信令。
在第五方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第二终端设备的协议栈中包括适配层，该适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，至少一个第一SRB的适配层协议数据单元PDU中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该适配层PDU对应的第一SRB。
在第三方面、第四方面或者第五方面，或者，在第三方面、第四方面或者第五方面中的任意一种可能的实现方式中，该第一SL RLC承载与该侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，该第二SL RLC承载对应第二信令无线承载SRB(即SL SRB)，该第一终端设备在该第二SRB上与该第二终端设备传输控制信令。第一终端设备在该第二SRB上与第二终端设备传输控制信令或者控制面数据。在该实现方式中，通过为Uu SRB配置与SL SRB不同的SL RLC承载，由于SL SRB(第二SRB)和Uu SRB(第一SRB)对应的SL RLC承载不同，第一终端设备和第二终端设备便可以根据不同的SL RLC承载，区分在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的SL上的Uu SRB和SL SRB，在区分Uu SRB和SL SRB之后，便可以正确区分Uu SRB和SL SRB承载的控制信令，从而保证了控制信令的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
第六方面，提供了一种侧行链路数据包传输的方法，该方法的执行主体既可以是远端终端设备也可以是应用于远端终端设备的芯片。远端终端设备通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间传输数据和信令。该方法包括：第一终端设备(即远端终端设备)获取数据包；该第一终端设备根据该数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，其中，该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备(即中继终端设备)在该第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，该第一终端设备在该第二SRB 上与该第二终端设备传输控制信令。
第六方面提供的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，在Uu SRB(第一SRB)与SL SRB(第二SRB)承载的控制面数据均在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上传输时，通过数据包中携带的指示信息，确定该数据包对应的(或者属于)SRB为SL SRB或者为SL SRB，从而可以实现区分Uu SRB和SL SRB承载的数据包，从而保证了数据包的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
在第六方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一SRB和该第二SRB均对应该第一终端设备和该第二设备之间的侧行链路上相同的侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载。即第一SRB和第二SRB复用同一个SL RLC承载。
在本申请实施例中，该SL RLC承载还可以对应的是第一SRB和第二DRB(第一SRB和第二DRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)，第二DRB可以理解为SL DRB，SL DRB用于传输第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的用户面数据。
在本申请实施例中，该SL RLC承载还可以对应的是第一DRB和第二DRB，第二DRB可以理解为SL DRB，SL DRB用于传输第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的用户面数据。第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，Uu DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。
在本申请实施例中，该SL RLC承载还可以对应的是第一DRB和第二SRB。第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，Uu DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。
也就是说，在本申请实施例中，该SL RLC承载对应第一SRB和第二SRB(第一SRB和第二SRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)；或者，该SL RLC承载对应第一SRB和第二DRB(第一SRB和第二DRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)；或者，该SL RLC承载对应第一DRB和第二DRB(第一DRB和第二DRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)；或者，该SL RLC承载对应第一DRB和第二SRB(第一DRB和第二SRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)。
在第六方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一终端设备的协议栈中包括适配层，该适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，该第一终端设备根据该数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，包括：该终端设备根据该适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定该适配层协PDU对应该第一SRB或者第二SRB。
在第六方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一终端设备根据该数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，包括：
该第一终端设备根据分组数据汇聚协议数据单PDCP PDU中的指示信息，确定该PDCP PDU对应该第一SRB或者该第二SRB。
在第六方面一种可能的实现方式中，该第一SRB为多个第一SRB，该指示信息还用于指示：在该多个第一SRB中，该数据包对应的第一SRB。
在第六方面一种可能的实现方式中，该指示信息位于该数据包中的第一个八位字节oct中的第四比特和/或第三比特。
在第六方面一种可能的实现方式中，多个第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、 第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少两个。
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括用于执行以上第一方面、第二方面、第五方面至第六方面中任意一方面的各个步骤的单元，或者，包括用于执行以上第一方面、第二方面、第五方面至第六方面中的任意一方面可能的实现方式中的各个步骤的单元各个步骤的单元。
第八方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括用于执行以上第三方面或第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的各个步骤的单元，或者包括用于执行以上第四方面或第四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的各个步骤的单元。
第九方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括至少一个处理器和存储器，该至少一个处理器用于执行以上第一方面、第二方面、第五方面至第六方面中任意一方面的方法，或者，用于执行以上第一方面、第二方面、第五方面至第六方面中的任意一方面可能的实现方式中的实现方式中的方法。
第十方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括至少一个处理器和存储器，该至少一个处理器用于执行以上第三方面或第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法，或者，用于执行以上第四方面或第四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第十一方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括至少一个处理器和接口电路，该至少一个处理器用于执行以上第一方面、第二方面、第五方面至第六方面中任意一方面的方法，或者，用于执行以上第一方面、第二方面、第五方面至第六方面中的任意一方面可能的实现方式中的实现方式中的方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括至少一个处理器和接口电路，该至少一个处理器用于执行以上第三方面或第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法，或者，用于执行以上第四方面或第四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第十三方面，提供了一种终端设备，该终端设备包括上述第七方面、第九方面或者第十一方面提供的任一种通信装置。
第十四方面，提供了一种网络设备，该终端设备包括上述第八方面、第十方面或者第十二方面提供的任一种通信装置。
第十五方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，该计算机程序在被处理器执行时，用于执行第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面中的方法，或者，用于执行第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面中的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第十六方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序，当该计算机程序被执行时，用于执行第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面中的方法，或者，用于执行第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面中的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
第十七方面，提供了一种芯片，该芯片包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片的通信设备执行第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面中的方法，或者，用于执行第一方面至第六方面中任意一方面中的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。
本申请实施例提供的信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置，在存在中继终端设备 的情况下，通过为远端终端设备的Uu SRB或者Uu DRB在侧行链路上PC5接口上配置SL RLC承载，从而建立该SL RLC承载来传输Uu SRB或者Uu DRB。利用远端终端设备与中继终端设备之间的SL RLC承载来传输该Uu SRB承载的控制信令或者Uu DRB承载的用户面数据，可以提高Uu SRB或者Uu DRB传输的质量，提高控制信令或者用户面数据传输的效率。
附图说明
图1是PC5接口中用户面协议栈架构的示意图。
图2是为PC5接口上RRC协议的控制面协议栈架构的示意图。
图3是PC5接口中PC5-S协议的控制面协议栈架构的示意图。
图4是本申请提供的一例远端终端设备、中继终端设备以及网络设备的示意性架构图。
图5是本申请提供的一例中继终端设备的控制面协议栈架构的示意图。
图6是本申请提供的一例中继终端设备的用户面协议栈架构的示意图。
图7是本申请提供的一例适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意图。
图8是本申请实施例提供的一例两个终端设备建立通信连接的过程的示意图。
图9是本申请提供的另一例两个终端设备建立通信连接的过程的示意图。
图10是本申请提供的终端设备显示的界面的示意图。
图11本申请实施例提供的一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图12本申请实施例提供的另一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图13本申请实施例提供的另一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图14本申请实施例提供的又一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图15本申请实施例提供的又一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图16本申请实施例提供的一例适配层PDU的示意性结构图。
图17本申请实施例提供的另一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图18本申请实施例提供的又一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图19本申请实施例提供的又一例信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图。
图20本申请实施例提供的一例侧行链路数据包传输的方法的示意性流程图。
图21本申请实施例提供的另一例侧行链路数据包传输的方法的示意性流程图。
图22本申请实施例提供的包括适配层的协议栈的示意性结构图。
图23本申请实施例提供的Uu SRB承载的PDCP PDU格式的示意图。
图24本申请实施例提供的SL SRB承载的PDU格式的示意图。
图25是本申请实施例提供的另一例通信装置结构的示意性框图。
图26是本申请实施例提供的又一例通信装置结构的示意性框图。
图27是本申请实施例提供的另一例终端设备结构的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
在本申请实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示或的意思，例如，A/B可以表示A或B；本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，在本申请实施例的描述中，“多个”是指两个或多于两个。
以下，术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：V2X、设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信系统、长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access，WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th Generation，5G)系统或新无线(New Radio，NR)等。
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。V2X通信系统中的汽车、车载设备、路边装置(road site unit，RSU)等。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备。例如，可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元，车辆通过内置的该车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片、车载单元或者路边站等。或者还可以是未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(Public Land Mobile Network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
本申请实施例中的网络设备(或者可以称为无线接入网设备)可以具有能够为终端设备提供随机接入功能的设备或可设置于该设备的芯片，该设备包括但不限于：演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、节点B(Node B，NB)、基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，home evolved NodeB，或home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)，无线保真(wireless fidelity，WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point，AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission and reception point，TRP或者transmission point，TP)等，还可以为5G，如，NR，系统中的gNB，或，传输点(TRP或TP)，5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板，或者，还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点，如基带单元(BBU)，或，分布式单元(DU，distributed unit)、未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等，本申请实施例并不限定。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层，以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central  processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统，例如，Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备，或者，是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于:磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
V2X通信是车联网中实现环境感知、信息交互的重要关键技术，这里的其他设备可以是其他车辆、其他基础设施、行人、终端设备等。V2X通信可以看成是设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信的一种特殊情形。不同用户终端设备之间的通信链路可以称之为SL。
在V2X通信中，相互通信的两个终端设备利用PC5接口进行控制信息和数据的传输。PC5接口也可以称为PC5参考点，是两个终端设备之间通信的接口。PC5接口信令(PC5signalling,PC5-S)可以包括：直接通信请求/接受(Direct Communication Request/Accept)、链路标识符(Link Identifier)、更新请求/响应/确认(Update Request/Response/Ack)、断开连接请求/响应(Disconnect Request/Response),链路修改请求/接受(Link Modification Request/Accept)等。
相互通信的设备(例如终端设备A和终端设备B)具有一定的协议栈架构，在新无线侧行链路(New Radio sidelink，NR SL)通信中，支持单播、组播、广播传输模式。业务数据和控制面数据分别通过PC5接口上的用户面协议栈和控制面协议栈进行传输。图1所示的为PC5接口中用户面协议栈架构的示意图，如图1所示的，PC5接口上的用户面协议栈(protocol stack)包括：业务数据适配层(Service Data Adaptation Protocol，SDAP)、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层和物理层(physics，PHY)。图2所示的为PC5接口上RRC协议的控制面协议栈架构的示意图，包括无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和PHY层。图3所示的为PC5接口中PC5-S协议的控制面协议栈架构的示意图，包括PC5-S层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和PHY层。
其中，PHY层位于最低层，也可以称为层一(Layer 1)。MAC层、RLC以及PDCP属于中间层，也可以称为层二(Layer 2)。RRC属于更高层，也可以称为层三(Layer3)。
在SL上，包括两种无线承载(radio bearers，RB)，一种为SL数据无线承载(SL data radio bearers，SL DRB)，另一种为SL信令无线承载(SL signalling radio bearers，SL SRB),SL SRB传输的控制面数据包括PC5接口上的RRC信令和PC5-S。
当一个终端设备需要向另一个终端设备传输SL SRB时，该终端设备需要建立PDCP实体、RLC实体和相应的逻辑信道，用于建立SL SRB需要的配置信息，例如包括：PDCP配置、RLC配置以及MAC配置等。
当一个终端设备需要向另一个终端设备传输SL DRB时，该终端设备也需要建立PDCP实体、RLC实体和相应的逻辑信道，用于建立SL DRB需要的配置信息，例如包括：PDCP配置、RLC配置以及MAC配置等。
由图2和图3可知，侧行链路上的无线承载在PC5接口上是通过PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层以及PHY传输的。其中，RLC承载配置是无线承载配置的低层部分，包括RLC配置和逻辑信道配置等。
本申请实施例中，终端设备除了可以直接与网络设备(例如基站)通信之外，还可以通过其他终端设备与基站通信。例如在公共安全public safety的场景或商业场景或车联网场景下，中继终端设备可以作为远端终端设备的中继，使得远端终端设备能够通过中继终端设备与基站通信，这种技术称为UE2NW relay技术。当一个终端设备距离网络设备较远(例如不在网络设备的覆盖范围内)，或者终端设备处于网络设备的覆盖边缘，或者终端设备与网络设备之间的链路质量较差，或终端设备不能够被网络设备直接服务，或终端设备未设置Uu口，或者终端设备电量较低，或者终端设备处于节能模式，或者终端设备希望节省功耗，该终端设备便可以通过中继终端设备(UE-to-Network Relay UE)和网络设备通信。在本申请实施例中，中继终端设备也可以称为中继用户设备(Relay UE)，中继终端设备可以是为远端(Remote)终端设备提供网络接入的终端设备，在本申请实施例中，远端终端设备也可以称为远端用户设备(Remote UE)。中继终端设备为远端终端设备提供中继服务。对于中继终端设备为远端终端设备提供中继服务可以理解为，远端终端设备发送给该网络设备的信息，通过中继终端设备转发给该网络设备，该网络设备发送给远端终端设备的信息，也通过中继终端设备转发给远端终端设备。图4所示的为一例远端终端设备、中继终端设备以及无线接入网设备的示意性架构图。如图4所示的，远端终端设备与中继终端设备之间通过PC5接口进行侧行链路上的通信，并通过中继终端设备连接至无线接入网设备(radio access network,RAN)，无线接入网络设备连接核心网络设备，核心网络设备进一步的与数据网络进行通信。其中，中继终端设备通过Uu接口与无线接入网设备之间进行通信。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，网络设备也可以称为无线接入网设备。例如，该网络设备或者无线接入网设备可以为基站。
图5所示的为一例UE-to-Network Relay的控制面协议栈架构的示意图。远端终端设备与无线接入网设备之间的控制面数据是通过中继终端设备在RLC层上转发的。远 端终端设备的Uu接口上的PDCP层和RRC层在远端终端设备和无线接入网设备之间是端到端连接的。也就是说，在PDCP和RRC层连接上，远端终端设备与无线接入网设备是端到端连接，远端终端设备的Uu接口上的PDCP层和RRC层在无线接入网设备终止。远端终端设备和无线接入网设备分别建立对应的PDCP实体后，远端终端设备和无线接入网设备便可以存在对应的端到端连接。
如图5所示的，远端终端设备的RLC层、MAC层和PHY层在远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间、以及在中继终端设备和无线接入网设备之间是端到端的。在中继终端设备和远端终端设备分别建立对应的RLC实体、逻辑信道，以及中继终端设备和无线接入网设备分别建立对应的RLC实体、逻辑信道后，便可以进行远端终端设备与无线接入网设备之间的控制信令的传输。
如图5所示的，远端终端设备的RRC消息和非接入层(Non-access stratum，NAS)消息在中继终端设备和无线接入网设备之间通过中继终端设备透明传输，即中继终端设备只需要中转RRC消息和NAS消息即可，而不更改RRC消息和NAS消息。中继终端设备也可以不解码RRC消息和NAS消息。PDCP层在Uu接口(即远端终端设备和无线接入网设备之间的Uu接口)上在远端终端设备和无线接入网设备之间是端到端的，中继终端设备在远端终端设备和无线接入网设备之间中继PDCP协议数据单元(分组数据汇聚协议数据单元(packet data convergence protocol Data Unit，PDCP PDU))。在一些可能的实现方式中，中继终端设备对于PDCP PDU可以不解码，然后通过自身的PC5-RLC实体传给远端终端设备。在远端终端设备和中继终端之间，Uu接口上的PDCP PDU在PC5接口上通过RLC层、MAC层以及PHY层传输。本申请实施例中，无线接入网设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送控制面数据(例如配置信息、RRC消息)可以是使用图5所示的协议栈架构发送的，第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收无线接入网设备发送的控制面数据(例如配置信息、RRC消息)可以是使用图5所示的协议栈架构接收的。远端终端设备和中继终端设备的协议栈中分别可以包括中继适配层(Adaptation Relay)。中继适配层用于区分或标识不同的远端终端设备的无线链路控制服务数据单元(Radio Link Control Service Data Unit，RLC SDU)或PDCP PDU。中继适配层还可以用于区分或标识一个远端终端设备的不同的无线承载的RLC SDU或PDCP PDU。
图6所示的为一例UE-to-Network Relay的用户面协议栈架构的示意图，远端终端设备与无线接入网设备之间的用户面数据是通过中继终端设备在RLC层之上转发的。远端终端设备的Uu接口上的PDCP层和RRC层在远端终端设备和无线接入网设备之间是端到端连接的。也就是说，在PDCP和RRC层连接上，远端终端设备与无线接入网设备是端到端连接，远端终端设备的Uu接口上的PDCP层和RRC层在无线接入网设备上终止。远端终端设备和无线接入网设备分别建立对应的PDCP实体后，远端终端设备和无线接入网设备便可以存在对应的端到端连接。
如图6所示的，RLC层、MAC层和PHY层在远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间、以及在中继终端设备和无线接入网设备之间是端到端的。远端终端设备的RLC层、MAC层和PHY层在中继终端设备终止。远端终端设备的Uu接口上的PDCP PDU在中继终端设备和无线接入网设备之间通过中继终端设备透明传输，即中继终端设备只 需要转发PDCP PDU即可，而不更改PDCP PDU。中继终端设备可以不解码PDCP PDU数据，然后通过自身的PC5-RLC层传给远端终端设备。PDCP层在Uu接口上在远端终端设备和无线接入网设备之间是端到端的，中继终端设备在远端终端设备和无线接入网设备之间中继PDCP PDU。在远端终端设备和中继终端之间，Uu接口上的PDCP PDU在PC5接口上通过RLC层、MAC层以及PHY层传输。远端终端设备的Uu口上的DRB在Uu口上通过PDCP层以及在PC5接口上通过RLC层、MAC层以及PHY层传输。在本申请实施例中，远端终端设备与无线接入网设备之间传输的数据包也可以称为远端终端设备Uu接口上的数据包，该数据包是通过中继终端设备进行中转的。本申请实施例中，无线接入网设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送用户面数据可以是使用图6所示的协议栈架构发送的，第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收无线接入网设备发送的用户面数据可以是使用图6所示的协议栈架构接收的。
应理解，SL通信指的两个终端设备的之间的直接通信，这两个终端设备之间的接口(或者参考点)称为PC5接口。在本申请实施例中，PC5表示第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的接口或者参考点。在本申请实施例中，SL通信也可以称为PC5通信。PC5-RLC承载表示的是第一终端设备(远端终端设备)和第二终端设备(中继终端设备)之间在PC5接口上的RLC承载，PC5-RLC承载也可以称为SL RLC承载。PC5-RLC实体也可以称为SL RLC实体。中继终端设备与无线接入网设备之间建立Uu-RLC承载，中继终端设备与远端终端设备之间建立SL RLC承载或者PC5-RLC承载。
远端终端设备Uu接口上的无线承载包括用于传输用户面的数据的DRB和用于传输控制面数据的SRB。远端终端设备的Uu口上的DRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的DRB，该DRB用于承载远端终端设备向网络设备发送的用户面数据，或者网络设备向远端终端设备发送的用户面数据。远端终端设备的Uu口上的SRB可以理解为远端终端设备与网络设备之间的SRB，该SRB用于承载远端终端设备向网络设备发送的控制信令，或者网络设备向远端终端设备发送的控制信令。在本申请实施例中，为了方便描述，远端终端设备在Uu接口上传输的SRB可以简称为Uu SRB，远端终端设备在Uu接口上传输的DRB可以简称为Uu DRB。在远端终端设备通过中继终端设备与网络设备通信的场景下，该Uu接口上SRB或DRB是先通过PC5接口传输至中继终端设备，进而由中继终端设备转发给无线接入网设备的。也就是说，远端终端设备在Uu接口上的SRB或DRB是需要通过远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的PC5接口上RLC层、MAC层以及PHY层传输至中继终端设备，再通过中继设备传输至无线接入网设备。
远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的SL上的无线承载也包括用于传输用户面的数据的DRB和用于传输控制面数据的SRB。为了区分，将远端终端设备和中继终端设备的SRB称为SL SRB，将远端终端设备和中继终端设备的DRB称为SL DRB。SL SRB用于承载远端终端设备向中继终端设备发送的控制信令或者控制面数据，或者中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送的控制信令或者控制面数据。SL DRB用于承载远端终端设备向中继终端设备发送的用户面数据，或者中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送的用户面数据。SL SRB或SL DRB需要通过远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的PC5接口上RLC层、MAC层以及PHY层传输。
目前，远端终端设备的Uu SRB或Uu DRB利用的Uu RLC承载，Uu RLC承载可以理解为网络设备和远端终端设备之间的Uu接口上的RLC承载，但是在存在中继终端设备的情况下，远端终端设备的Uu SRB或Uu DRB无法利用Uu RLC承载，即远端终端设备与无线接入网设备在Uu接口上没有对等的RLC实体。例如在图5所示的架构中，远端终端设备在RLC层中没有建立Uu-RLC实体，从而无法保障远端终端设备的Uu SRB上的控制信令或Uu DRB上的用户面数据的正常传输，导致控制信令传输或用户面数据的效率较低。
有鉴于此，本申请提供了一种信令无线承载配置或数据无线承载配置的方法，通过为远端终端设备的Uu SRB或Uu DRB在侧行链路上PC5接口上配置SL RLC承载，从而建立该SL RLC承载来传输Uu SRB或Uu DRB。利用远端终端设备与中继终端设备之间的SL RLC承载来传输该Uu SRB承载的控制信令或Uu DRB承载的用户面数据，可以提高控制信令或用户面数据的质量，提高控制信令或用户面数据传输的效率。
本申请提供的方法可以应用在图4所示的场景中，当然，也可以应用在其他具有远端终端设备和中继终端设备的场景中。例如，图7所示的为另一例适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意图。如图7所示，该移动通信系统可以包括至少一个无线接入网设备110和至少一个终端设备(如图7中所示的终端设备120、130、140、150，160)。其中，终端设备130、150、以及160可以为远端终端设备，终端设备130通过中继终端设备120与无线接入网设备110之间进行通信。终端设备140或者终端设备160通过中继终端设备140与无线接入网设备110之间进行通信。无线接入网设备可以是上述的网络设备。至少一个终端设备可以发送上行数据或者信息给无线接入网设备，无线接入网设备110也可以将下行数据或者信息发送给至少一个终端设备。并且，多个终端设备也可以组成一个通信系统，例如，终端设备140、150，160可以组成一个通信系统，终端设备140也可以将下行数据或者信息发送给终端设备150和160，终端设备150和160也可以将上行数据或者信息发送给终端设备140。
应理解。图7只是示意图，该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备和/或终端设备，在图7中未画出。本申请的实施例对该移动通信系统中包括的无线接入网设备和终端的数量不做限定。在移动通信系统中，无线接入网设备110可以是上述的网络设备。并且，网络设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构。例如，如图1至3、图5至图6所示的协议层架构。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
下面简单介绍第一终端设备(远端终端设备)和第二终端设备(中继终端设备)建立通信连接过程，在第一终端设备和第二终端设备建立通信连接后，第一终端设备便可以通过第二终端设备与网络设备之间传输数据或者控制信令。
当第一终端设备在网络设备信号覆盖范围的边缘或者不在网络设备信号覆盖的范围之内时，例如，用户使用第一终端设备时，发现第一终端设备的信号非常差，数据传输时延较大，如图8中的a图所示的，用户可以点击第一终端设备上界面上的“设置”菜单，显示的界面如图8中的b图所示的，显示“搜索中继设备”菜单。“搜索中继设备”表示希望通过其他的终端设备与网络设备之间进行通信。用户打开“搜索中继设备”菜单后，如图8中的c图所示的，在第一终端设备的界面上可以向用户显示可以作为中继设备的其他终端设备的信息。例如，第一终端设备可以通过现有的无线网络通信协 议等通信技术进行其他设备的搜索，将可以作为第一终端设备的中继设备的其他设备的信息显示给用户。用户可以点击可连接的其他设备中的一个，在用户点击该终端设备(例如为第二终端设备)后，表示第一终端设备确定通过第二终端设备与网络设备之间进行数据和/或控制信令的传输。即第二终端设备将作为第一终端设备的中继设备。
可选的，将可以作为第一终端设备的中继设备的其他设备的信息显示给用户时，可以显示其他设备的标识、序列号或者型号等。例如，该序列号可以为进网许可编号等。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，另一种第一终端设备搜索中继终端设备并与中继终端设备建立连接的过程为：在第一终端设备的系统设置里面有个菜单，例如该菜单的名称为“连接中继设备”或者其他名称等，如图9中的a图所示的为第一终端设备显示的主界面示意图，用户点击“设置”，出现如图9中的b图所示，用户打开“连接中继设备”，意味着用户需要连接中继终端设备，并通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间进行数据和/或控制信令的传输。用户点击“连接中继设备”后，第一终端设备可以自动搜索或者连接附近可用的其他终端设备，在连接成功后，如图9中的图所示，第一终端设备可以向用户显示“中继设备已经连接”的提示，用于向用户通知已经连接上了中继设备。这样，可以实现用户的无感知连接中继终端设备，提高用户体验。
可选的，在用户操作第一终端设备，希望第二终端设备作为第一终端设备的中继设备时，进一步的，在第二终端设备的显示界面上，还可以向第二终端设备的用户显示“是否作为第一终端设备的中继设备”的提示。如图10中所示的，第二终端设备的用户点击“确定”，则表示允许作为第一终端设备的中继设备。如果不同意，则用户可以点击“取消”，则第一终端设备不能将该第二终端设备作为中继设备。
可选的，在本申请实施例中的，第一终端设备可以是用户使用的智能可穿戴设备，例如为：智能手表、智能手环等，第二终端设备可以为：用户使用的手机、便携电脑、上网本、PDA等设备。在这种情况下，在第二终端设备的显示界面上，可以向用户显示“是否作为第一终端设备的中继设备”的提示信息。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备可以通过：无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wi-Fi)网络)，蓝牙(bluetooth，BT)，调频(frequency modulation，FM)，近距离无线通信技术(near field communication，NFC)，红外技术(infrared，IR)等无线通信通信技术搜索可与作为中继设备的其他设备。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，在第一终端设备搜索并连接中继设备时，可以设置一些连接规则：例如，与第一终端设备属于同一品牌的手机自动连接，或者，第一终端设备自动连接与上次连接时的相同的设备，即实现自动连接。
可选的，在第一终端设备自动搜索并连接其他终端设备作为中继设备的过程中，第一终端设备还可根据之前与其他设备的连接情况，自动向用户推荐可作为中继设备的其他设备。例如，假设第一终端设备经过搜索后发现：与第一终端设备可连接的、并且可作为中继设备的其他设备与用户上次使用中继设备相同，则自动连接与上次相同的中继设备，即实现自动连接。
本申请中的实施例以信令无线承载配置为例进行说明，可以理解的是，本申请提供的远端终端设备的Uu SRB在PC5接口上的RLC承载的方法，也可应用于配置远端终端设备的Uu DRB在PC5接口上的RLC承载。
下面结合图11详细说明本申请提供通信方法，图11是本申请一个实施例的信令无线承载配置的方法200的示意性流程图，该方法200可以应用在图4或者图7至图10所示的所示的场景中，本申请实施例在此不作限制。
应理解，下文的描述中，以第一终端设备、第二终端设备以及网络设备作为各个实施例的执行方法的执行主体为例，对各个实施例的方法进行说明。第一终端设备可以为上述的远端终端设备，第二终端设备可以为上述的中继终端设备，网络设备可以为上述的接入网设备。作为示例而非限定，执行方法的执行主体也可以是应用于第一终端设备、第二终端设备以及网络设备中的芯片。
如图11所示，该方法200包括：S210至S230。
S210，第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息。
在本申请实施例中，该第一配置信息，包括：
第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、至少一个第一DRB(即Uu DRB)的标识或索引、或者第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识(logical channel identity,LCID)中的一个或多个。其中，该LCID用于标识第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道，第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识可以理解为第一SL RLC承载配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识第一SL RLC承载配置。至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引可以理解为至少一个第一SRB配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识至少一个第一SRB配置，SL RLC配置信息用于建立或配置或重配置RLC实体，至少一个第一DRB的标识或索引可以理解为至少一个第一DRB配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识至少一个第一DRB配置。
其中，SL RLC配置可以包括：RLC模式和相应的参数，RLC模式可以包括：确认模式(acknowledged mode，AM)、非确认模式(unacknowledged mod，UM)等。相应的参数可以包括：序列号(sequence numbers，SN)域的长度、用于重传poll的定时器(timer)、最大重传次数等。侧行链路逻辑信道配置可以包括：SL逻辑信道优先级、优先比特速率等。
在S210中，第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息可以理解为该第一配置信息是由第二终端设备发送给第一终端设备，包括如下三种情况：
第一种：该第一配置信息是第二终端设备自己确定并生成的，然后发送给第一终端设备。
第二种：该第一配置信息也可以是网络设备确定的，网络设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息。第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息。该第一配置信息是第二终端设备从网络设备中继给第一终端设备的。网络设备先将第一配置信息发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备直接转发给第一终 端设备。第二终端设备可以不对第一配置信息进行解析。第一配置信息可以包括在网络设备发送给第一终端设备的RRC消息中。该RRC消息可以是通过图5所示的协议栈架构中继的，即在RLC层之上中继。该RRC消息通过网络设备与第二终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给第二终端设备，第二终端设备再将该RRC消息通过第二终端设备与第一终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给第一终端设备。可选的，第二终端设备也可以对第一配置信息进行解析，但不对第一配置信息进行更改。例如，第二终端设备接收到的包含第一配置信息的RRC消息后，解析该RRC消息，并将该RRC消息通过第二终端设备与第一终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给第一终端设备。
第三种：该第一配置信息是第二终端设备根据网络设备发送给第二终端设备的第三配置信息设置的，然后发送给第一终端设备。网络设备可以将第三配置信息通过第一信令发送给第二终端设备(例如RRC信令)，第二终端设备接收该信令，解析该信令，然后根据第三配置信息设置或确定第一配置信息，并利用与第一信令不同的第二信令(例如RRC重配置信令)将该第一配置信息发送给第一终端设备。
其中，第二终端设备为第一终端设备的中继终端设备，第一终端设备通过第二终端设备与网络设备之间进行数据或者控制信令的传输。
应理解，在本申请的实施例中，第一终端设备除了可以通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息之外，第一配置信息还可以是预先定义的，在这种情况下，第一终端设备也可以不用通过第二终端设备获取该第一配置信息，第一终端设备可以直接确定或者获取该第一配置信息。
该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一SL RLC承载的信息，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。在本申请实施例中，第一SRB可以理解为Uu SRB，第一SRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的控制信令。
在本申请实施例中，控制信令也可以理解为控制面数据，包括RRC消息和NAS消息等。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。也就是说，该第一SL RLC承载可以对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上可以存在多个SL RLC承载，也就是说，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以在该侧行链路上建立多个SL RLC承载。
例如，第二终端设备可以通过PC5接口上的RRC信令(例如，RRC重配置消息RRCReconfigurationSidelink)向第一终端设备发送该第一配置信息。或者，第二终端设备转发网络设备发送给第一终端设备的包括该第一配置信息的RRC信令(例如，RRC建立(RRCSetup)消息或者RRC重配(RRCReconfiguration)消息)。
S220，该第一终端设备根据该第一配置信息，建立该第一SL RLC承载，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB。
在S220中，第一终端设备根据该第一配置信息，建立该第一SL RLC承载。该第 一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。例如，在配置第一SL RLC承载时，第一SL RLC承载的配置信息(例如第一配置信息)可以携带至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引，用于指示第一SL RLC承载和至少一个第一SRB之间的对应关系。或者，在至少一个第一SRB的配置信息中携带第一SL RLC承载的标识或索引，用于指示第一SL RLC承载和至少一个第一SRB之间的对应关系。或者，配置至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引与第一SL RLC承载的标识和索引的对应关系。
或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB。例如，在配置第一SL RLC承载时，第一SL RLC承载的配置信息(例如第一配置信息)可以携带至少一个第一DRB的标识或索引，用于指示第一SL RLC承载和至少一个第一DRB之间的对应关系。或者，在至少一个第一DRB的配置信息中携带第一SL RLC承载的标识或索引，用于指示第一SL RLC承载和至少一个第一DRB之间的对应关系。或者，配置至少一个第一DRB的标识或索引和第一SL RLC承载的标识和索引的对应关系。第一终端设备建立与第二终端设备之间的SL RLC承载可以包括：第一终端设备建立RLC实体、配置/建立逻辑信道等。第一终端设备根据第一配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息建立RLC实体。RLC实体根据该SL RLC配置信息处理RLC SDU或RLC PDU。第一终端设备根据第一配置信息中的逻辑信道配置信息和/或逻辑信道标识或索引建立逻辑信道。MAC实体根据该逻辑信道配置信息处理MAC SDU或MAC PDU。由于第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB，第一SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体、逻辑信道均与至少一个第一SRB对应。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，由于第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，第一SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体、逻辑信道均与至少一个第一DRB对应。
在本申请实施例中，至少一个第一SRB可以理解为至少一个Uu SRB，至少一个Uu SRB可以包括：Uu SRB0、Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2或者Uu SRB3中的一个或者多个。第一SL RLC用于承载一个Uu SRB或者多个Uu SRB。也就是说，可以为每一个Uu SRB单独建立一个对应的第一SL RLC承载，或者，也可以为多个不同的Uu SRB建立同一个第一SL RLC承载。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备也可以为每一个Uu DRB单独建立一个对应的第一SL RLC承载，或者，也可以为多个不同的Uu DRB建立同一个第一SL RLC承载。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，第二终端设备也需要建立与第一SL RLC承载对应SL RLC承载。换句话说，第一终端设备和第二终端设备均需要分别建立该第一SL RLC承载。例如，第二终端设备可以根据第一配置信息，建立RLC实体、配置/建立逻辑信道等。
S230，该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备在该至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。
在S230中，在第一终端设备和第二终端设备分别建立第一SL RLC承载(包括建立RLC实体、配置逻辑信道)，以及第一终端设备建立了第一SRB对应的PDCP实体后，第一终端设备便可以通过该第二终端设备在至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备在该第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制 信令可以理解为：第一终端设备在该第一SRB上，通过第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的PC5接口将控制信令发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备再将该控制信令发送给网络设备。从而实现了第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上，利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以保障第一终端设备的Uu SRB上的控制信令的正常传输，提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量和效率。
可选的，作为另外一种可能的实现方式，在S230中，当第一终端设备和第二终端设备建立第一SL RLC承载(包括建立RLC实体、配置逻辑信道)，以及第一终端设备建立了第一DRB对应的PDCP实体后，第一终端设备也可以通过该第二终端设备在至少一个第一DRB上与网络设备传输用户面数据。可以保障第一终端设备的Uu DRB上的数据的正常传输，提高Uu DRB传输的用户面数据的质量和效率。
在S230中，示例性的，例如，当第一终端设备要向网络设备传输第一SRB时，第一终端设备的第一SRB对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，经过PDCP实体的处理得到PDCP PDU。由于S220中，第一终端设备建立了第一SRB对应的第一SL RLC承载，包括建立RLC实体，以及建立或配置逻辑信道，第一终端设备将PDCP PDU递交给第一SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用第一SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将该RLC PDU发送给第二终端设备。由于第二终端设备建立了第一SRB对应的第一SL RLC承载，包括建立RLC实体，以及建立或配置逻辑信道。第二终端设备根据该SL逻辑信道，便可以确定该SL逻辑信道对应的SRB为第一SRB。第二终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到第一终端设备发送的RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给第一SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体。第二终端设备经过该RLC实体的处理后得到RLC SDU。由于该RLC实体对应第一SRB，且第一SRB用于传输第一终端设备与网络设备之间的控制信令，因此，第二终端设备将该RLC SDU通过第二终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载发送给网络设备。例如，第二终端设备在建立与网络设备之间的RLC承载时，会根据配置信息确定第一SRB对应的第二终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载，即确定第一SRB对应的是哪一个RLC承载。例如，网络设备可以配置该SRB或DRB与该RLC承载的对应关系或映射关系或关联关系。因此，在第二终端设备将该第一SRB发送给网络设备时，会根据第一SRB确定对应的RLC承载，在对应的RLC承载上向网络设备发送该第一SRB。
当网络设备要向第一终端设备传输第一SRB时，网络设备的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，经过PDCP实体的处理得到PDCP PDU，网络设备确定与第一SRB对应的RLC承载，将PDCP PDU通过第二终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载发送给第二终端设备。第二终端设备根据接收到该PDCP PDU的RLC承载，便可以确定该RLC承载上的PDCP PDU对应第一SRB。第二终端设备接收到该PDCP PDU后递交给第一SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用第一SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将该RLC PDU发送给第一终端设备。第一终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到第二终端设备发送的RLC PDU，第一终端设备根据接收到该RLC PDU的SL逻辑信道，便可以确定该SL逻辑信道对应的SRB为第一SRB。第一终端设备将RLC PDU递交给第一SL RLC承 载对应的RLC实体，并经过该RLC实体的处理后得到RLC SDU，第一终端设备确定该RLC SDU对应第一SRB，因此，将该RLC SDU递交给第一SRB对应的PDCP实体。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的PC5接口可能同时需要传输SL SRB，以及，Uu SRB或者Uu DRB。SL SRB也是利用SL RLC承载。因此，可能存在不能区分在PC5接口传输的是SL SRB，还是Uu SRB或者Uu DRB。从而导致控制信令或者数据的传输可能产生混淆。例如，Uu SRB承载的控制信令本来是第一终端设备通过第二终端设备发给网络设备的，而第二终端设备接收到该控制信令之后，并不能区分该控制信令是发给自己的还是发送给网络设备的，可能无法正确解析控制信令，造成控制信令传输失败。
因此，在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备建立的第一SL RLC承载与侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，该第二SL RLC承载对应第二SRB，第二SRB可以理解为SL SRB。第一终端设备在该第二SRB上与第二终端设备传输控制信令或者控制面数据。
本申请提供的信令无线承载配置的方法，通过为Uu SRB配置与SL SRB不同的SL RLC承载，由于SL SRB(第二SRB)和Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载不同，第一终端设备和第二终端设备便可以根据不同的SL RLC承载，区分在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的SL上的Uu SRB和SL SRB，在区分Uu SRB和SL SRB之后，便可以正确区分Uu SRB和SL SRB承载的控制信令，从而保证了控制信令的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
作为另一种实现方式，在本申请实施例中，通过为Uu DRB配置与SL DRB不同的SL RLC承载，由于SL DRB(第二SRB)和Uu DRB对应的SL RLC承载不同，第一终端设备和第二终端设备便可以根据不同的SL RLC承载，区分在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的SL上的Uu DRB和SL DRB，在区分Uu DRB和SL DRB之后，便可以正确区分Uu DRB和SL DRB承载的控制信令，从而保证了数据的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
应理解，在本申请的实施例中，在Uu SRB配置与SL SRB为不同的SL RLC承载的情况下，或者，在Uu SRB配置与SL SRB为相同的SL RLC承载的情况下，一种可能的实现方式为：在标准协议中定义Uu SRB0对应的SL RLC承载配置。在标准协议中定义Uu SRB1/Uu SRB2/Uu SRB3对应的默认的SL RLC承载配置。网络设备还可以配置Uu SRB1/Uu SRB2/Uu SRB3的SL RLC承载配置。应理解，Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2和Uu SRB3分别对应的SL RLC承载可以为不同的RLC承载。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
可选的，在本申请的一些可能的实现方式中，如图12所示，图12是本申请一些实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图，在图11所示的方法步骤的基础上，该方法200还包括：S211。
S211，该第一终端设备向该第二终端设备发送第二配置信息，该第二配置信息是根据该第一配置信息确定的。
图12所示的步骤S210、S220、S230可以参考上述对于S210、S220、S230的相 关描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
在S211中，在该第一配置信息是网络设备先发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备直接转发给第一终端设备的情况下，第一终端设备可以根据第一配置信息，确定第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于第二终端设备建立第一SL RLC承载。第二配置信息包括的内容可以和第一配置信息包括的内容相同，或者，第二配置信息包括的内容也可以是第一配置信息包括的内容的子集，或者，第二配置信息包括的内容是根据第一配置信息确定的与第一配置信息不同的内容，或者，第二配置信息包括的部分内容可以和第一配置信息包括的部分内容相同。在第一终端设备确定或者生成该第二配置信息后，第一终端设备便可以向第二终端设备发送该第二配置信息。例如，第一终端设备可以通过PC5接口上的RRC信令，向第二终端设备发送该第二配置信息。示例性的，该RRC信令可以是RRC重配消息(RRCReconfigurationSidelink)。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，在S210中，如果该第一配置信息是网络设备先发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备直接转发给第一终端设备的情况下，第一终端设备接收到该第一配置信息后，第一终端设备也可以将该第一配置信息直接发给第二终端设备，而不用向第二终端设备发送该第二配置信息。
也就是说，在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备可以向第二终端设备发送第一配置信息或者第二配置信息。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，第二配置信息，包括：
第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、至少一个第一DRB的标识或索引、或者第一SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个。
第一配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息、逻辑信道配置信息可以包含该SL RLC承载的发送端特有的信息，以及发送端和接收端共有的信息。第二配置信息中可以包含该SL RLC承载的发送端和接收端共有的信息，从而第二终端设备接收到第二配置信息后，可以确定出第一SL RLC承载的接收端信息。可选的，第二配置信息中还可以包含该SL RLC承载的发送端特有的信息，第二终端设备接收到第二配置信息后，还可以确定出第一SL RLC承载的发送端信息，从而第二终端设备可以向第一终端设备使用该SL RLC承载传输网络向第一终端设备发送的控制信令。
可选的，第二配置信息中的LCID可以是第一终端设备根据第一配置信息确定，或者，也可以是第一终端设备自行确定的，即第一终端设备确定该LCID时可以不需要该第一配置信息。在第一终端设备自行确定LCID的情况下，第一终端设备还可向网络设备指示该LCID。第一终端设备还可向网络设备指示该LCID对应第一SL RLC承载或者第一SRB或者第一DRB。例如，第一终端设备向网络设备发送指示信息，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SL RLC承载的标识或索引，或者，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SRB的标识或索引。或者，第二终端设备接收到第二配置信息并确定第二配置信息中的LCID后，第二终端设备向网络设备指示该LCID。第二终端设备还可向网络设备指示该LCID对应第一SL RLC承载或者第一SRB或者第一DRB。例如，第二终端设备向网络设备发送指示信息，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SL  RLC承载的标识或索引，或者，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SRB的标识或索引。在第一终端设备根据第一配置信息确定LCID的情况下，该LCID是网络设备确定的，并通过第一配置信息发送给第一终端设备的。
可选的，第二配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息可以与第一配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息是相同的，第二配置信息中的逻辑信道配置信息可以与第一配置信息中的逻辑信道配置信息是相同的。例如，在这种情况下，第二配置信息中可以包含该SL RLC承载的发送端特有的信息，以及发送端和接收端共有的信息。
在该第一配置信息是网络设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的情况下，可选的，第二配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息可以与第一配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息是不同的。第二配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息可以用于配置SL RLC接收端参数。第二配置信息中的逻辑信道配置信息可以与第一配置信息中的逻辑信道配置信息是不同的。第二配置信息中的逻辑信道配置信息可以用于配置逻辑信道接收端参数。
可选的，在本申请的一些可能的实现方式中，如果该第一配置信息是第二终端设备根据网络设备发送给第二终端设备的第三配置信息设置的，然后在发送给第一终端设备的情况下，如图13所示，图13是本申请一些实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图，如图13所示，该方法200包括：S2101、S2102、S220和S230。
S2101,网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三配置信息，第三配置信息用于该第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载。
S2102，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息，该第一配置信息是第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的。
图13所示的步骤S220、S230可以参考上述对于S220、S230的相关描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
在S2101中，网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三配置信息，第三配置信息用于该第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载。例如，第三配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、至少一个第一DRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，第三配置信息可以通过RRC信令发送，例如，网络设备可以通过RRC建立信令(RRCSetup)或RRC重配置信(RRCReconfiguation)向第二终端设备发送第三配置信息。
在S2102中，第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息，该第一配置信息是该第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的。可选的，第一配置信息包括的内容可以和第三配置信息包括的内容相同，或者，第一配置信息包括的内容可以为第三配置信息包括的内容的子集，或者，第一配置信息包括的内容是根据第三配置信息确定的与第三配置信息不同的内容，或者，第一配置信息包括的部分内容可以和第三配置信息包括的部分内容相同。
可选的，第一配置信息中的LCID可以是第二终端设备自己确定或者选择的，而不是根据第三配置信息确定的，或者，第一配置信息中的LCID可以是第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定或者选择的。在第二终端设备自己确定或选择LCID的情况下， 第二终端设备还可向网络设备指示该LCID。第二终端设备还可向网络设备指示该LCID对应第一SL RLC承载或者第一SRB或者第一DRB。例如，第二终端设备向网络设备发送指示信息，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SL RLC承载的标识或索引，或者，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SRB的标识或索引。第一终端设备接收到第一配置信息并确定第一配置信息中的LCID后，第一终端设备向网络设备指示该LCID。第一终端设备还可向网络设备指示该LCID对应第一SL RLC承载或者第一SRB或者第一DRB。例如，第一终端设备向网络设备发送指示信息，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SL RLC承载的标识或索引，或者，指示信息包括或指示LCID和第一SRB的标识或索引。在第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定LCID的情况下，该LCID是网络设备确定的。
可选的，第二终端设备可以通过PC5接口上的RRC信令(例RRCReconfiguationSidelink)向第一终端设备发送该第一配置信息。
可选的，在本申请一些可能的实现方式中，在S210中，如果第一配置信息是网络设备确定的，并通过第二终端设备发给第一终端设备的情况下，网络设备还可以向第二终端设备发送上述的第三配置信息。在这种情况下，第二终端设备接收到该第三配置信息后，可以不用向第一终端设备发送上述的第一配置信息。并且，第一终端设备接收到该第一配置信息后，也可以不用向第二终端设备发送上述的第二配置信息。在第一终端设备接收到该第一配置信息后，或者，第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一配置信息对应的响应消息后，第一终端设备便可以建立该第一SL RLC承载。第二终端设备接收到该第三配置信息后，或者，第二终端设备向网络设备发送第三配置信息对应的响应消息后，也可以建立第一SL RLC承载。在第一终端设备和第二终端设备建立第一SL RLC承载之后，第一终端设备便可以通过该第二终端设备在至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，或者在至少一个第一DRB上与网络设备传输用户面数据。第一配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息、逻辑信道配置信息可以包含该SL RLC承载的发送端特有的信息，以及发送端和接收端共有的信息。第一终端设备通过第一配置信息可以确定出第一SL RLC承载的发送端信息和接收端信息。第三配置信息中的SL RLC配置信息、逻辑信道配置信息可以包含该SL RLC承载的发送端特有的信息，以及发送端和接收端共有的信息。第二终端设备通过第三配置信息可以确定出第一SL RLC承载的发送端信息和接收端信息。第一配置信息和第三配置信息可以是相同的，从而第一终端设备和第二终端设备确定出的发送端信息和接收端信息，并且第一终端设备确定出的接收端信息与第二终端设备的发送端信息相匹配，第二终端设备确定出的接收端信息与第一终端设备的发送端信息相匹配。可选的，在本申请的一种可能的实现方式是，网络设备先向第二终端设备发送第三配置信息，待确认第二终端设备接收到第三配置信息后，或接收到第二终端设备发送的第三配置信息对应的响应消息后，网络设备再向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息。
可选的，在本申请的一些可能的实现方式中，如图14所示，图14是本申请一些实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图，在图11所示的方法步骤的基础上，该方法200还包括：S221。
S221,该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，该第四配置信息 包括：至少一个第一SRB中的一个或多个第一SRB的配置信息，该第一SRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB对应的PDCP配置信息、第一SRB的标识或者第一SRB的索引中的至少一个。或者，该第四配置信息包括：至少一个第一DRB中的一个或多个第一DRB的配置信息，该第一DRB的配置信息包括：该第一DRB对应的PDCP配置信息、第一DRB的标识或者第一DRB的索引中的至少一个。
图14所示的步骤S210、S220、S230可以参考上述对于S210、S220、S230的相关描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
可选的，第四配置信息和第一配置信息放置在同一个信息元素(information element,IE)中，或者，第四配置信息和第一配置信息放置在不同的信息元素中，或者，第四配置信息和第一配置信息放置在同一个消息中，或者，第四配置信息和第一配置信息放置在不同的消息中。
可选的，第四配置信息或第一SRB的配置信息还可以包括：第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
可选的，第四配置信息或第一DRB的配置信息还可以包括：第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
可选的，该第一SRB或者第一DRB对应的PDCP配置信息和第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识可以放置在同一个信息元素(information element,IE)中，或者，也可以在放置在不同的IE中，本申请实施例在此不作限制。
在S221中，第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，可以包括以下三种情况：
第一种：该第四配置信息是第二终端设备自己确定并生成的，然后发送给第一终端设备。
第二种：该第四配置也可以是网络设备确定的，网络设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第四配置信息。第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第四配置信息。网络设备先将第四配置信息发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备直接转发给第一终端设备。第二终端设备可以不对第四配置信息进行解析。第四配置信息可以包括在网络设备发送给第一终端设备的RRC消息中。该RRC消息通过网络设备与第二终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给第二终端设备，第二终端设备再将该RRC消息通过第二终端设备与第一终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给第一终端设备。第二终端设备也可以对第四配置信息进行解析，但不对第四配置信息进行更改。例如，第二终端设备接收到的包含第四配置信息的RRC消息后，解析该RRC消息，并将该RRC消息通过第二终端设备与第一终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给第一终端设备。
第三种：该第四配置信息是第二终端设备根据网络设备发送给第二终端设备的其他配置信息(例如第六配置信息)设置的，然后第二终端设备将该第四配置信息发送给第一终端设备。网络设备可以将第六配置信息通过第一信令发送给第二终端设备(例如RRC信令)，第二终端设备接收该信令，解析该信令，然后根据第六配置信息设置或确定第四配置信息，并利用与第一信令不同的第二信令(例如RRC重配置信令)将该第四配置信息发送给第一终端设备。
第一终端设备接收到该四配置信息后，便可以确定至少一个第一SRB或者至少一 个第一DRB的配置信息。第一终端设备还可以根据第四配置信息确定第一SL RLC承载对应的是哪一个或者哪几个第一SRB，或者哪一个或者哪几个第一DRB。或者说确定一个或多个第一SRB对应第一SL RLC承载，或者确定一个或多个第一DRB对应第一SL RLC承载。即第一终端设备可以根据第四配置信息，将第一SL RLC承载与至少一个第一SRB或者第一DRB关联。换句话说，在第一SL RLC承载可以对应一个或者多个第一SRB或者第一DRB的情况下，第四配置信息还可以用于通知第一终端设备第一SL RLC承载和哪一个或者哪几个第一SRB或者第一DRB对应关系，保证了第一终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载对应的一个或者多个第一SRB或者第一DRB。从而可以保障第一终端设备通过第一SL RLC，通过第二终端设备在一个或者多个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。并且，第四配置信息中只需要包括第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，而不用携带第一SL RLC承载的具体配置信息，可以节省信令开销，提高资源的利用率。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，第四配置信息可以一次性发送，也可以分别通过不同的信令发送。
第四配置信息通过不同的信令的发送可以理解为：一个信令包括一个第一SRB或者第一DRB的配置信息，多个第一SRB或者多个第一DRB的配置信息需要通过多个信令分别发送。每个第一SRB或者每个第一DRB的配置都是独立的，每个第一SRB或者每个第一DRB的配置信息均包括：第一SRB或者第一DRB对应的PDCP配置信息、第一SRB或者第一DRB的标识、第一SRB或者第一DRB的索引中的至少一个。每个第一SRB或者每个第一DRB的配置信息还可以包括该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。也就是说，第四配置信息可以通过多个信令发送，每个信令包括：一个第一SRB或者一个第一DRB对应的PDCP配置信息。即多个第一SRB或者多个第一DRB的配置信息是分别发送的，不是一起发送的。
第四配置信息一次性发送的一种方式是在一个信令中包括：多个第一SRB或者多个第一DRB的配置信息，每个第一SRB或者每个第一DRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB或者第一DRB对应的PDCP配置信息、第一SRB的标识或者第一SRB的索引、第一DRB的标识或者第一DRB的索引中的至少一个。即多个第一SRB或者多个第一DRB的配置信息是一起发送的。在该信令中还可以包括：第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
第四配置信息一次性发送的另一种方式是在一个信令中包括：多个第一SRB或者多个第一DRB的配置信息，每个第一SRB或者每个第一DRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB或者第一DRB对应的PDCP配置信息、第一SRB的标识或者第一SRB的索引、第一DRB的标识或者第一DRB的索引中的至少一个。每个第一SRB或者每个第一DRB的配置信息还可以包括第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
可选的，在本申请的一些可能的实现方式中，如图15所示，图15是本申请一些实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法的示意性流程图，在图14所示的方法步骤的基础上，该方法200还包括：S222。
S222，该第一终端设备向该第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，该第五配置信息包括或指示：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，以及该至少一个第一SRB的标识或 索引。或者，该第五配置信息包括或指示：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，以及该至少一个第一DRB的标识或索引。
图15所示的步骤S210、S220、S221、S230可以参考上述对于S210、S220、S221、S230的相关描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
在S222中，第一终端设备向该第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，第五配置信息可以用于第一终端设备将第一SL RLC与至少一个第一SRB关联。换句话说，在第一SL RLC承载可以对应一个或者多个第一SRB的情况下，第五配置信息用于通知第二终端设备第一SL RLC承载和哪一个或者哪几个第一SRB对应关系，保证了第二终端设备可以确定第一SL RLC承载的一个或者多个第一SRB。从而可以保障第二终端设备通过第一SL RLC，在一个或者多个第一SRB上传输第一终端设备与网络设备之间的控制信令。
可选的，如果第四配置信息是网络设备通过第一信令发送给第二终端设备(例如RRC信令)，第二终端设备接收该信令，解析第四配置信息，并利用与第一信令不同的第二信令(例如RRC重配置信令)将该第四配置信息发送给第一终端设备的情况下，第一终端设备也可以不用向第二终端设备发送第五配置信息。
可选的，在第四配置信息是第二终端设备直接转发网络设备发送给第一终端设备的信令，并且第二终端设备对第四配置信息进行解析的情况下，第一终端设备也可以不用向第二终端设备发送第五配置信息。
应理解，在图14和图15所示的流程图中，对于S220和S221的执行顺序不作限制。例如，在多个第一SRB对应同一个SL RLC(第一SL RLC)承载的情况下，一种情况是：第一终端设备收到第一个第一SRB的配置信息以及第一配置信息后，建立第一个第一SRB承载。建立第一个第一SRB承载包括第一SL RLC承载。第一终端设备再收到第二个第一SRB的配置信息，建立第二个第一SRB承载。第二个第一SRB承载也对应第一SL RLC承载。另一种情况是：第一终端设备收到两个第一SRB的配置信息以及第一配置信息后，分别建立两个第一SRB承载，建立第一SRB承载包括建立第一SL RLC承载。S210和S221的执行顺序也不作限制。可以先执行S210，后执行S221。或者先执行S221，后执行S210。或者同时执行S210和S221。
应理解，在本申请的各个实施例中，各个配置信息均可以利用RRC建立(RRCSetup)消息或者RRC重配置(RRCReconfiguration)消息发送，或者，还可以利用其它的信令发送，本申请实施例不作限制。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，作为另一种可能的实现方式，该第五配置信息包括：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，以及该至少一个第一DRB的标识或索引息。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，如果第一SL RLC承载对应多个第一SRB。第一SL RLC承载对应多个第一SRB可以理解为多个第一SRB使用同一个RLC实体、同一个逻辑信道传输。例如第一SL RLC承载对应Uu SRB0、Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2或者Uu SRB3中的至少两个，在这种情况下，由于多个不同的Uu SRB均对应第一SL RLC，在这种情况下，需要区分多个不同的Uu SRB承载的控制信令(控制面数据包)。
对于区分多个不同的Uu SRB承载的控制信令(控制面数据包)，一种可能的实现方式为：远端终端设备和中继终端设备的协议栈中的PDCP层(PDCP层实体)可 以在多个Uu SRB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU分别中添加第一指示信息，例如，可以利用现有的PDCP PDU中的某一个或者某几个预留比特来指示或者表示该第一指示信息。该第一指示信息用于指示多个Uu SRB的PDCP PDU分别对应的(或者属于)是哪一个Uu SRB。也就是说，第一终端设备和第二终端设备的PDCP实体可以在PDCP PDU中添加并解析第一指示信息。例如，具体的，第一指示信息可以包含PDCP PDU header中。
例如，假设第一SL RLC承载对应Uu SRB1和Uu SRB2，则可以在Uu SRB1和Uu SRB2的PDCP PDU中分别包括指示信息，Uu SRB1的PDCP PDU中的指示信息用于指示该PDCP PDU对应Uu SRB1，Uu SRB 2的PDCP PDU中的指示信息用于指示该PDCP PDU对应Uu SRB2。这样，第一终端设备和第二终端设备便可以区分某一个PDCP PDU对应的Uu SRB是哪一个Uu SRB，从而可以正确区分不同的Uu SRB承载的数据包，提高数据传输的质量和效率。
例如，假设Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2复用一个SL RLC承载：
当远端终端设备要向网络设备传输Uu SRB1或Uu SRB2时，如果是Uu SRB1，远端终端设备的Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中添加指示信息，指示为Uu SRB1。如果是Uu SRB2，Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中添加指示信息，指示为Uu SRB2。之后，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体或Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体将PDCP PDU通过Uu SRB1和Uu SRB2对应的SL RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。具体的，PDCP实体将PDCP PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将RLC PDU发送给中继终端设备。中继终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到远端终端设备发送的RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC SDU，中继终端设备将该RLC SDU通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载发送给网络设备。网络设备收到该RLC SDU后，根据该RLC SDU中的指示信息，确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1还是Uu SRB2。以Uu SRB1为例，网络设备可以确定出该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1后，再将该RLC SDU递交给Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体。或者，网络设备将该RLC SDU分别递交给Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体和Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体根据指示信息确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1，Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体根据指示信息确定该RLC SDU对应的不是Uu SRB2，Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体可以将该RLC SDU丢弃。
当网络设备要向远端终端设备传输Uu SRB1或Uu SRB2时，如果是Uu SRB1，网络设备的Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中添加指示信息，指示为Uu SRB1。如果是Uu SRB2，Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中添加指示信息，指示为Uu SRB2。之后，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体或Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体将PDCP PDU通过网络设备与中继终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。中继终端设备接收到该PDCP PDU后，将该PDCP PDU通过Uu SRB1和Uu SRB2对应的SL RLC承载发送给远端 终端设备。具体的，中继终端设备将该PDCP PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将RLC PDU发送给远端终端设备。远端终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到中继终端设备发送的RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC SDU，远端终端设备根据该RLC SDU中的指示信息，确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1还是Uu SRB2。以Uu SRB1为例，远端终端设备可以确定出该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1后，再将该RLC SDU递交给Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体。或者，远端终端设备将该RLC SDU分别递交给Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体和Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体根据指示信息确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1，Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体根据指示信息确定该RLC SDU对应的不是Uu SRB2，Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体可以将该RLC SDU丢弃。
例如，上述的第一指示信息可以位于PDCP PDU包括的第一个八位字节(Oct，octet)中的一个或多个比特上，例如，位于Oct1上的第二比特和/或第三比特。
对于区分多个不同的Uu SRB承载的控制信令(控制面数据包)，另一种可能的实现方式为：在第一终端设备和第二终端设备的协议栈中，分别可以添加适配层(Adapation)，可选的，该适配层位于RLC层和PDCP层之间。该适配层用于在适配层的PDU中添加或者解析第二指示信息，该第二指示信息指示适配层的PDU对应的(或者属于)是哪一个Uu SRB。适配层的PDU包括第二指示信息和适配层从高层收到的SDU。例如，图16所示的为适配层PDU的示意性结构图，如图16所示的，适配层PDU包括两部分，第一部分包括的比特位(第1至N比特)为第二指示信息，第二部分包括的比特位(第N+1至M比特)为适配层的SDU，其中，N和M均为正整数，M-N≥1。
例如，假设Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2复用一个SL RLC承载：
当远端终端设备要向网络设备传输Uu SRB1或Uu SRB2时，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体或Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，经过PDCP实体的处理后，将PDCP PDU递交给适配层，如果是Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体的PDU，适配层设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB1。如果是Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体的PDU，适配层设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB2。适配层将从上层接收的SDU加上指示信息，形成适配层的PDU。远端终端设备将该适配层的PDU通过Uu SRB1和Uu SRB2对应的SL RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。适配层将PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道发送给中继终端设备。中继终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到远端终端设备发送的RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC SDU。中继终端设备将该RLC SDU通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载发送给网络设备。网络设备收到该RLC SDU后，将该RLC SDU递交给适配层，适配层根据PDU中的指示信息，确定该PDU对应的是Uu SRB1还是Uu SRB2，进而将适配层的SDU递交给对应的PDCP实体，PDCP实体处理后将PDCP SDU递交给上层。
当网络设备要向远端终端设备传输Uu SRB1或Uu SRB2时，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体或Uu SRB2对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，经过PDCP实体的处理后，将PDCP PDU递交给适配层，如果是Uu SRB1的PDCP实体的PDU，适配层设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB1。如果是Uu SRB2的PDCP实体的PDU，适配层设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB2。适配层将从上层接收的SDU加上该指示信息，形成适配层的PDU。网络设备将该适配层的PDU通过网络设备与中继终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。中继终端设备收到该适配层的PDU后，将该适配层的PDU通过Uu SRB1和Uu SRB2对应的SL RLC承载发送给远端终端设备。具体的，中继终端设备将该适配层的PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将RLC PDU发送给远端终端设备，远端终端设备便可以在该SL逻辑信道上接收到中继终端设备发送的RLC PDU。在远端终端设备将该RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过RLC实体处理后得到RLC SDU，将RLC SDU递交给适配层，适配层根据RLC SDU中的指示信息，确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1还是Uu SRB2，经适配层处理得到适配层SDU，进而将适配层的SDU递交给对应的PDCP实体，PDCP实体处理后将PDCP SDU递交给上层。
应理解，由于Uu SRB0承载的数据包没有经过PDCP层，对于Uu SRB0与其他Uu SRB复用一个SL RLC承载的情况下，可以利用添加适配层的方式在数据包添加指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该数据包对应(或者属于)的Uu SRB为哪一个Uu SRB。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，在第一SL RLC承载对应多个第一SRB的情况下，除了利用上述的两种方式区分多个不同的Uu SRB承载的数据包之外，还可以利用其它方式来区分多个不同的Uu SRB承载的数据包，本申请实施例在此不作限制。
在不同的Uu SRB复用一个SL RLC承载的情况下，通过在数据包中添加指示信息，可以准确的区分该数据包对应的Uu SRB，可以提高数据包传输的质量和效率。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，如果第一SL RLC承载对应多个第一DRB，第一SL RLC承载对应多个第一DRB可以理解为多个第一DRB使用同一个RLC实体、同一个逻辑信道传输。在这种情况下，由于多个不同的Uu DRB均对应第一SL RLC，需要区分多个不同的Uu DRB分别承载的用户面数据。对于区分多个不同的Uu DRB分别承载的用户面数据，也可以利用上述类似的区分多个不同的Uu SRB承载的控制信令的方式，来区分多个不同的Uu DRB分别承载的用户面数据。类似的描述可以参考上述的描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
下面将结合具体的例子说明建立Uu SRB对应的第一SL RLC承载的方法。
应理解，在本申请中，对于信令/消息/信息的发送或者接收，例如，RRC重配置消息(RRCReconfiguration)、RRC建立消息(RRCSetup)、无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)、SL RLC承载配置(SL-RLC-BearerConfig)、SL RLC配置(SL-RLC-ConfigPC5)、SL逻辑信道配置(SL-LogicalChannelConfig)、SL媒体接入控制逻辑信道配置(sl-MAC-LogicalChannelConfig)等类似的表述中，括号中的内容表示对应的信令/消息/信息的IE的一种示例。
图17是本申请一些实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法300的示意性流程图。如 图17所示，该方法300包括：S310至S340。
S310，网络设备通过中继终端设备(即第二终端设备)向远端终端设备(即第一终端设备)发送Uu SRB(即第一SRB)无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)信息和Uu SRB对应的SL RLC(即第一SL RLC)承载配置信息。
可选的，网络设备可以通过RRC消息发送该信息。该RRC消息可以为RRC建立消息(RRCSetup)或者为RRC重配置消息(RRCReconfiguration)。应理解，网络设备也可以通过其他信令通过中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送Uu SRB无线承载配置信息和Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置信息。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
其中，SL RLC承载配置(SL-RLC-BearerConfig)可以包括：
SL RLC配置(sl-RLC-Config)、侧行链路逻辑信道配置(SL-LogicalChannelConfig)、侧行链路媒体接入控制逻辑信道配置(sl-MAC-LogicalChannelConfig)中的一种或者多种，该SL为远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的侧行链路。
其中，SL RLC配置可以包括：RLC模式和相应的参数，RLC模式可以包括：确认模式(acknowledged mode，AM)、非确认模式(unacknowledged mod，UM)等。相应的参数可以包括：序列号(sequence numbers，SN)域的长度、用于重传poll的定时器(timer)、最大重传次数等。侧行链路逻辑信道配置可以包括：SL逻辑信道优先级、优先比特速率等。
可选的，该SL RLC承载配置，还可以包括：
SL RLC承载配置的标识或者索引、Uu SRB的标识或索引、或者SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个，其中，该LCID用于标识SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道，SL RLC承载的索引或者标识可以理解为SL RLC承载配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识SL RLC承载配置。Uu SRB的标识或索引可以理解为Uu SRB配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识Uu SRB配置。
可选的，SL RLC承载配置可以直接包含在RRC消息中，或者，还可以包含在RRC消息中的小区组配置(CellGroupConfig)中，或者，还可以包含在Uu SRB的无线承载配置中。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
Uu SRB无线承载配置信息可以包括：
该Uu SRB承载的PDCP配置、该Uu SRB无线承载的索引、或者该Uu SRB无线承载的标识中的一个或多个。
可选的，该无线承载配置信息还可以包括该Uu SRB无线承载对应的SL RLC承载的标识或索引。
网络设备通过中继终端设备(即第二终端设备)向远端终端设备(即第一终端设备)发送Uu SRB对应的SL RLC(即第一SL RLC)承载配置信息SL RLC(即第一SL RLC)承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S210中的第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息的相关描述。SL RLC承载配置信息可以参考S210中的第一配置信息的相关描述。
网络设备通过中继终端设备(即第二终端设备)向远端终端设备(即第一终端设备)发送Uu SRB(即第一SRB)无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)信息可以参考上 述方法200中S221中的第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备接收第四配置信息的相关描述。Uu SRB无线承载配置信息还可以上述方法200中S221中的第四配置信息的相关描述。
S320，远端终端设备选择该SL RLC承载对应的LCID。可选的，该LCID可以为网络设备确定的，可以包括在S310中远端终端设备接收的SL RLC承载配置中。该LCID可以用于标识该SL RLC承载或者用于标识该SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道。
S330，远端终端设备向中继终端设备发送Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置。例如，远端终端设备可以通过SL RRC消息(远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的PC5接口上的RRC消息)向中继终端设备发送该信息。可选的，SL RRC消息可以是SL RRC重配置信息(RRC ReconfigurationSidelink消息)。
远端终端设备向中继终端设备发送Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置可以参考上述方法200中S211中的第一终端设备向该第二终端设备发送第二配置信息的相关描述。SL RLC承载配置可以参考上述方法200中S211中的第二配置信息的相关描述。
S330中的SL RLC承载配置包括的全部内容或者部分内容可以是根据S310中的SL RLC承载配置确定的，例如，S330中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容可以和S310中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容相同，或者为S310中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容的子集，或者S330中的SL RLC承载配置包括的部分内容与S310中的SL RLC承载配置包括的部分内容相同。
例如，S330中的SL RLC承载配置可以包括:侧行链路上发送端和接收端共同的(或者公共的)SL RLC承载配置信息(如SN域的长度)。S330中的SL RLC承载配置还可以包括侧行链路上发送端所需的SL RLC承载配置信息(如用于重传poll的timer、最大重传次数等)。中继终端设备可以根据该SL RLC承载配置建立相同的SL RLC承载。
远端终端设备还可以向中继终端设备发送Uu SRB的索引或标识，用于中继终端设备确定SL RLC承载配置对应的Uu SRB。该Uu SRB的索引或标识可以包含在SL RLC承载配置中，也可以不在SL RLC承载配置中。
在S330之后，远端终端设备和中继终端设备获取了Uu SRB无线承载配置信息和Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置，在S340中，中继终端设备和远端终端设备可以建立SL RLC承载，该SL RLC承载对应至少一个Uu SRB。例如，在S330之后，中继终端设备可以向远端终端设备发送回复消息，该回复消息可以为侧行链路RRC配置完成消息(RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink)，远端终端设备收到该消息后，建立该SL RLC承载。对于中继终端设备，在S330之后，可以建立该SL RLC承载。或者，远端终端设备在S330之后不等中继终端设备的回复消息就建立SL RLC承载。或者，远端终端设备在S330之前建立SL RLC承载。例如，远端终端设备在确定了LCID后(在S320后)就建立SL RLC承载。或者，远端终端设备在S310之后建立SL RLC承载。从而实现了利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量，提高控制信令传输的效率。
图18是本申请一些实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法400的示意性流程图。如图17所示，该方法400包括：S410至S450。
S410，网络设备通过中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送Uu SRB无线承载配置信息。例如，网络设备可以通过RRC消息发送该信息。该RRC消息可以为RRC建立消息(RRCSetup)或者为RRC重配置消息(RRCReconfiguration)。
Uu SRB无线承载配置信息可以包括：
该Uu SRB无线承载的PDCP配置、该Uu SRB无线承载的索引、或者该Uu SRB无线承载的标识中的一个或多个。
可选的，该Uu SRB无线承载配置信息还可以包括Uu SRB该无线承载对应的SL RLC承载的标识或索引。
网络设备通过中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送Uu SRB无线承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S221中的第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备接收第四配置信息的相关描述。Uu SRB无线承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S221中的第四配置信息的相关描述。
S420，网络设备向中继终端设备发送SL RLC承载配置，可选的，网络设备可以通过RRC消息向中继终端设备发送SL RLC承载配置。该RRC消息可以为RRC建立消息(RRCSetup)或者为RRC重配置消息(RRCReconfiguration)。
SL RLC承载配置(SL-RLC-BearerConfig)可以包括：
SL RLC配置(sl-RLC-Config)、侧行链路逻辑信道配置(SL-LogicalChannelConfig)、侧行链路媒体接入控制逻辑信道配置(sl-MAC-LogicalChannelConfig)中的一种或者多种，该SL为远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的侧行链路。
其中，SL RLC配置可以包括：RLC模式和相应的参数，RLC模式可以包括：AM模式、UM模式。相应的参数可以包括：SN域的长度、用于重传poll的定时器(timer)、最大重传次数等。侧行链路逻辑信道配置可以包括：SL逻辑信道优先级、优先比特速率等。
可选的，该SL RLC承载配置，还可以包括：
SL RLC承载配置的标识或者索引、Uu SRB的标识或索引、或者SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个，其中，该LCID用于标识SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道，RLC承载的索引或者标识可以理解为SL RLC承载配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识SL RLC承载配置。Uu SRB的标识或索引可以理解为Uu SRB配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识Uu SRB配置。
S420可以参考上述方法200中S2101的相关描述，SL RLC承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S2101中的第三配置信息的相关描述。
S430，中继终端设备选择SL RLC承载对应的LCID。可选的，该LCID也可以为网络设备确定的，可以包括在S420中中继终端设备接收的SL RLC承载配置中。
S440，中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送与Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置。例如，中继终端设备可以通过SL RRC消息(中继终端设备和远端终端设备之间的PC5接口上的RRC消息)向远端终端设备发送该信息。
S440中的SL RLC承载配置包括的全部内容或者部分内容可以是根据S420中的SL RLC承载配置确定的，例如，S440中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容可以和S420 中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容相同，或者为S420中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容的子集，或者S440中的SL RLC承载配置包括的部分内容与S420中的SL RLC承载配置包括的部分内容相同。
例如，S440中的SL RLC承载配置可以包括:侧行链路上发送端和接收端共同的(或者公共的)SL RLC承载配置信息(如SN域的长度)。S330中的SL RLC承载配置还可以包括侧行链路上发送端所需的SL RLC承载配置信息(如用于重传poll的timer、最大重传次数等)。中继终端设备和中继终端设备可以根据该SL RLC承载配置建立相同的SL RLC承载。
中继终端设备还可以向远端终端设备发送Uu SRB的索引或标识，用于远端终端设备确定SL RLC承载配置对应的Uu SRB。该Uu SRB的索引或标识可以包含在SL RLC承载配置中，也可以不在SL RLC承载配置中。
中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送与Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置可以参考上述方法200中S2102中的第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息的相关描述。SL RLC承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S2102中的第一配置信息的相关描述。
在S440之后，远端终端设备和中继终端设备获取了Uu SRB无线承载配置信息和Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置，在S450中，中继终端设备和远端终端设备可以建立SL RLC承载，该SL RLC承载对应至少一个Uu SRB。例如，远端终端设备在S440之后，可以建立该SL RLC承载。对于中继终端设备而言，在S440之后，远端终端设备可以向中继终端设备发送回复消息，该回复消息可以为侧行链路RRC配置完成消息(RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink)，中继终端设备收到该消息后，建立该SL RLC承载。或者，中继终端设备在S440之后不等远端终端设备的回复消息就建立该SL RLC承载。或者，中继终端设备在S440之前建立该SL RLC承载。例如，中继终端设备在确定了LCID后(在S430后)就建立该SL RLC承载。或者，中继终端设备在S420之后建立该SL RLC承载。从而实现了利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量，提高控制信令传输的效率。
图19是本申请一些实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法500的示意性流程图。如图18所示，该方法500包括：S510至S530。
S510，网络设备通过中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送Uu SRB无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)信息和Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置信息。例如，网络设备可以通过RRC消息发送该信息。该RRC消息可以为RRC建立消息(RRCSetup)或者为RRC重配置消息(/RRCReconfiguration)。
SL RLC承载配置(SL-RLC-BearerConfig)可以包括：
SL RLC配置(sl-RLC-Config)、侧行链路逻辑信道配置(SL-LogicalChannelConfig)、侧行链路媒体接入控制逻辑信道配置(sl-MAC-LogicalChannelConfig)中的一种或者多种，该SL为远端终端设备和中继终端设备之间的侧行链路。
其中，SL RLC配置可以包括：RLC模式和相应的参数，RLC模式可以包括：AM模式、UM模式等。相应的参数可以包括：SN域的长度、用于重传poll的定时器(timer)、 最大重传次数等。侧行链路逻辑信道配置可以包括：SL逻辑信道优先级、优先比特速率等。
可选的，该SL RLC承载配置，还可以包括：
SL RLC承载配置的标识或者索引、Uu SRB的标识或索引、或者SL RLC承载对应的LCID中的一个或多个，其中，该LCID用于标识SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道，RLC承载的索引或者标识可以理解为SL RLC承载配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识SL RLC承载配置。Uu SRB的标识或索引可以理解为Uu SRB配置的索引或者标识，用于指示或者标识Uu SRB配置。
Uu SRB无线承载配置信息可以包括：
该Uu SRB无线承载的PDCP配置、该Uu SRB无线承载的索引、或者该Uu SRB无线承载的标识中的一个或多个。
可选的，该Uu SRB无线承载配置信息还可以包括该Uu SRB无线承载对应的SL RLC承载的标识或索引。
网络设备通过中继终端设备(即第二终端设备)向远端终端设备(即第一终端设备)发送Uu SRB对应的SL RLC(即第一SL RLC)承载配置信息SL RLC(即第一SL RLC)承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S210中的第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息的相关描述。SL RLC承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S210中的第一配置信息的相关描述。
网络设备通过中继终端设备(即第二终端设备)向远端终端设备(即第一终端设备)发送Uu SRB(即第一SRB)无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)信息可以参考上述方法200中S221中的第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备接收第四配置信息的相关描述。Uu SRB无线承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S221中的第四配置信息的相关描述。
S520，网络设备向中继终端设备发送Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置信息。例如，可选的，网络设备可以通过RRC消息向中继终端设备发送SL RLC承载配置。该RRC消息可以为RRC建立消息(RRCSetup)或者为RRC重配置消息(RRCReconfiguration)。
S520中的SL RLC承载配置包括的全部内容或者部分内容可以是根据S510中的SL RLC承载配置确定的，例如，S520中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容可以和S510中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容相同，或者为S510中的SL RLC承载配置包括的内容的子集，或者S520中的SL RLC承载配置包括的部分内容与S510中的SL RLC承载配置包括的部分内容相同。
网络设备还可以向中继终端设备发送Uu SRB的索引或标识，用于中继终端设备确定SL RLC承载配置对应的Uu SRB。该Uu SRB的索引或标识可以包含在SL RLC承载配置中，也可以不在SL RLC承载配置中。
网络设备向中继终端设备发送Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S2101中的网络设备向第二终端设备发送第三配置信息的相关描述。SL RLC承载配置信息可以参考上述方法200中S2101中的第三配置信息的相关描述。
在S520之后，远端终端设备和中继终端设备获取了Uu SRB无线承载配置信息和 Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置，在S530中，中继终端设备和远端终端设备可以建立SL RLC承载，该SL RLC承载对应至少一个Uu SRB。例如，远端终端设备可以在接收到该Uu SRB无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)信息和Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置信息后，建立SL RLC承载。中继终端设备在S520之后建立SL RLC承载。从而实现了利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量，提高控制信令传输的效率。可选的，在本申请实施例中，除了上述的配置Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置方式外，还可以利用其它的配置流程建立Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
可选的，在本申请另一些可能的实现方式中，在配置Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载配置中，一种可能的情况为：可以为每一种Uu SRB单独配置一种SL RLC，即不同的Uu SRB对应不同的SL RLC承载。另一种可能的情况为：不同的Uu SRB可以复用一个SL RLC承载，即为不同的Uu SRB配置相同的SL RLC承载，例如，Uu SRB0、Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2、Uu SRB3中的至少两个Uu SRB复用一个SL RLC承载。在这种情况下，在重新配置Uu SRB对应的SL RLC承载时，SL RLC承载配置信息可以只包括SL RLC承载配置的标识或者索引，而不用在重新配置SL RLC承载配置的具体配置信息，这样可以节省信令的开销。
例如，假设方法300至方法500中配置的均为Uu SRB1无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)。而Uu SRB1和Uu SRB2复用一个SL RLC承载，则在利用方法300至方法500中重新配置Uu SRB2无线承载配置(radioBearerConfig)和Uu SRB2对应的SL RLC承载配置信息时，方法300至方法500中的对应的步骤可以修改为如下的步骤：
对于方法300：在S310中，SL RLC承载配置(SL-RLC-BearerConfig)可以包括：Uu SRB1的无线承载配置和对应的SL RLC承载配置(radioBearerConfig)的索引或标识。在S330中，远端终端设备向中继终端设备发送与Uu SRB2配置对应的SL RLC承载配置的索引或标识。
对于方法400：在S410中，网络设备向中继终端设备发送SL RLC承载配置可以包括：与Uu SRB2配置对应的SL RLC承载配置的索引或标识。在S440中，中继终端设备向远端终端设备发送Uu SRB2配置对应的SL RLC承载配置中，该Uu SRB2配置对应的SL RLC承载配置可以为Uu SRB2配置对应的SL RLC承载配置的索引或标识。
对于方法500：在S510中，网络设备向远端终端设备发送Uu SRB2无线承载配置信息和Uu SRB2对应的SL RLC承载配置信息。该Uu SRB2对应的SL RLC承载配置信息可以为Uu SRB2配置对应的SL RLC承载配置的索引或标识。在S520中，网络设备向中继终端设备发送Uu SRB2无线承载的标识或者索引、以及Uu SRB2无线承载对应的SL RLC承载配置，该Uu SRB2无线承载对应的SL RLC承载配置可以为Uu SRB2配置对应的SL RLC承载配置的索引或标识。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，如果第一SL RLC承载对应多个第一DRB。在这种情况下，远端终端设备和中继终端设备建立Uu DRB对应的第一SL RLC承载的方法具体过程和上述的方法300至方法500中建立Uu SRB对应的第一SL RLC承载的方 法类似，类似的描述可以参考上述的描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
图20所示的为本申请提供了一种侧行链路数据包传输的方法的示意性流程图。在Uu SRB(第一SRB)与SL SRB(第二SRB)承载的控制面数据均在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上传输时，通过数据包中携带的指示信息，确定该数据包对应的(或者属于)SRB为SL SRB或者为SL SRB，从而可以实现区分Uu SRB和SL SRB承载的数据包，从而保证了数据包的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
如图20所示的，该方法600包括：S610和S620。
S610，第一终端设备获取数据包。
在S610中，第一终端设备(远端终端设备)可以获取数据包，该数据包可以为控制面数据包，该数据包包括控制信令，例如，该数据包可以为PDCP PDU或者为SDU等。
第一终端设备获取的数据包可以包括两种情况：
一种情况为：第一终端设备接收到第二终端设备(中继终端设备)发送的数据包，该数据包可以为网络设备通过第二终端设备发送给第一终端设备的，即该数据包用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的控制信令。或者，该数据包为第二终端设备自己生成并发送给第一终端设备的，即该数据包用于传输第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的控制信令。
另一种情况为：第一终端设备获取需要发送的数据包，该数据包可以为第一终端设备通过第二终端设备向网络设备发送的数据包，或者，该数据包可以为第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送的数据包。
由于在Uu SRB(即第一SRB)与SL SRB(即第二SRB)承载的数据包均在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上传输，因此，第一终端设备需要发送的或者接收到的数据包中可以包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该数据包对应的(或者属于)SRB为SL SRB或者为Uu SRB。
S620，该第一终端设备根据该数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，其中，该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备在该第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，该第一终端设备在该第二SRB上与该第二终端设备传输控制信令。
在S620，该第一终端设备根据该数据包中的指示信息，便可以确定该数据包对应第一SRB或者第二SRB。其中，该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备在该第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，该第一终端设备在该第二SRB上与该第二终端设备传输控制信令。
在确定该数据包对应第一SRB或者第二SRB后，第一终端设备便可以正确的接收该数据包，或者，正确的向第二终端设备发送该数据包，或者，通过第二终端设备向网络设备发送该数据包。
本申请提供的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，在第一SRB与第二SRB承载的数据包均在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上传输时，通过解析数据包中携带的指示信息，根据该指示信息，确定该数据包为第一SRB还是为第二SRB承载的数据包，从而可以实现区分第一SRB和第二SRB承载的数据包，从而保证了数据包 的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，作为另一种可能的实现方式，由于在Uu DRB(即第一DRB)与SL DRB承载的数据包均在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上传输，因此，第一终端设备需要发送的或者接收到的数据包中可以包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该数据包对应(或者属于)Uu DRB或者SL DRB。则在S620中，该第一终端设备也可以根据该数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应或者属于第一DRB或者第二DRB(即SL DRB)，其中，该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备在该第一DRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，该第一终端设备在该第二DRB上与该第二终端设备传输用户面数据。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，作为另一种可能的实现方式，由于在Uu SRB(即第一SRB)与SL DRB(即第二DRB)承载的数据包均在第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上传输，因此，第一终端设备需要发送的或者接收到的数据包中可以包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该数据包对应(或者属于)Uu SRB或者SL DRB。则在S620中，该第一终端设备也可以根据该数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应或者属于第一SRB或者第二DRB(即SL DRB)，其中，该第一终端设备通过该第二终端设备在该第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，该第一终端设备在该第二DRB上与该第二终端设备传输用户面数据。
应理解，对于第二终端设备，也会解析获取的数据包中的指示信息，根据数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应第一SRB或者第二SRB。第二终端设备获取的数据包也可以包括两种情况：
一种情况为：第二终端设备接收到第一终端设备(中继终端设备)发送的数据包，该数据包可以为第一终端设备通过第二终端设备发送给网络设备的，即该数据包用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的控制信令。或者，该数据包可以为第一终端设备向第二终端设备的，即该数据包用于传输第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的控制信令。在这种情况下，第二终端设备可以根据该解析数据包中携带的指示信息，根据该指示信息，确定该数据包为第一SRB还是为第二SRB承载的数据包。
另一种情况为：第二终端设备获取需要发送的数据包，该数据包可以为网络设备通过第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的数据包，或者，该数据包可以为第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的数据包。在这种情况下，第二终端设备设备可以在数据包中添加指示信息，用于向第一终端设备指示该数据包为第一SRB还是为第二SRB承载的数据包，然后将该数据包发送给第一终端设备，以便于第一终端设备解析数据包中的指示信息。
可选的，在本申请一种可能的实现方式中：该第一SL RLC承载与侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，该第二SL RLC承载对应第二SRB，即该第一SRB和该第二SRB对应不同的SL RLC承载。
可选的，在另一种可能的实现方式中：该第一SL RLC承载与侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载相同，该第二SL RLC承载对应第二SRB。即该第一SRB和该第二SRB均对应该第一终端设备和该第二设备之间的侧行链路上相同的SL RLC承载，该第一SRB和该第二SRB可以复用同一个SL RLC承载。
可选的，在本申请又一种可能的实现方式中：该第一SL RLC承载与侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载相同，该第二SL RLC承载对应第二DRB。即该第一SRB和该第二DRB均对应该第一终端设备和该第二设备之间的侧行链路上相同的SL RLC承载，该第一SRB和该第二DRB可以复用同一个SL RLC承载，第二DRB可以理解为SL DRB。
可选的，在本申请又一种可能的实现方式中：该SL RLC承载还可以对应的是第一DRB和第二DRB，第二DRB可以理解为SL DRB，SL DRB用于传输第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的用户面数据。第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，Uu DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。
可选的，在本申请又一种可能的实现方式中：该SL RLC承载还可以对应的是第一DRB和第二SRB。第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，Uu DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。
也就是说，在本申请实施例中，该SL RLC承载对应第一SRB和第二SRB(第一SRB和第二SRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)；或者，该SL RLC承载对应第一SRB和第二DRB(第一SRB和第二DRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)；或者，该SL RLC承载对应第一DRB和第二DRB(第一DRB和第二DRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)；或者，该SL RLC承载对应第一DRB和第二SRB(第一DRB和第二SRB复用同一个SL RLC承载)。
在本申请一些可能的实现方式中，该第一终端设备和第二终端设备的协议栈中可以包括适配层(Adapation)，该适配层位于RLC层和PDCP层之间。该适配层用于在适配层的PDU中添加或者解析该指示信息，该指示信息指示适配层的PDU对应的(或者属于)第一SRB或者第二SRB，适配层的PDU包括指示信息和适配层从高层收到的SDU。例如，适配层的PDU的结构可以如图16所示的。如图21所示，图21是本申请一些实施例中的侧行链路数据包传输的方法的示意性流程图，图20中所示的方法步骤S620，可以包括S621。
S621，该终端设备根据该适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定该适配层协PDU对应该第一SRB或者第二SRB。
图21所示的步骤S620可以参考上述对于S620的相关描述，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
在S621中，例如，在Uu SRB(即第一SRB)与SL SRB(即第二SRB)对应相同的SL RLC承载的情况下，可以在远端终端设备(即第一终端设备)和中继终端设备(第二终端设备)的协议栈中分别增加一个适配层(Adapation)。适配层(适配层对应的实体)用于在数据包中(例如PDCP PDU或者RLC SDU)添加或者解析指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该数据包对应的是(或者属于)Uu SRB还是为SL SRB。如图22所示的，适配层可以位于RLC层与PDCP层之间，图22中实线箭头用于指示SL SRB传输，虚线箭头用于指示Uu SRB传输。
可选的，远端终端设备和中继终端设备也可以根据该适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定该适配层协PDU对应第一SRB或者第二DRB。
可选的，远端终端设备和中继终端设备也可以根据该适配层协议数据单元PDU中 的指示信息，确定该适配层协PDU对应第一DRB或者第二DRB。
一种可能实现方式为：当一个Uu SRB与一个SL SRB使用相同的SL RLC承载的情况下，例如，Uu SRB1与一个SL SRB1复用一个SL RLC承载，Uu SRB2与一个SL SRB2复用另一个SL RLC承载。适配层可以在数据包中添加指示信息，该指示信息的长度可以为1比特，该指示信息用于指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB还是为SL SRB。例如，指示信息的比特位的值设置为1，指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB，则中继终端设备设备在接收到该数据包后，解析该指示信息，确定需要将该数据包发送给网络设备。
例如，假设Uu SRB1、SL SRB复用一个SL RLC承载：
当远端终端设备要向网络设备传输Uu SRB1，或者远端终端设备需要向中继终端设备传输SL SRB时，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体或SL SRB对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，经过PDCP实体的处理后，将PDCP PDU递交给适配层，如果是Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体的PDU，适配层设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB1。如果是SL SRB对应的PDCP实体的PDU，适配层设置指示信息指示为SL SRB。也就是说，适配层将从上层接收的SDU加上指示信息，形成适配层的PDU。远端终端设备将该适配层的PDU通过Uu SRB1和SL SRB对应的SL RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。例如，远端终端设备的适配层将PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道发送给中继终端设备。中继终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到远端终端设备发送的RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC SDU，并将RLC SDU递交给适配层，适配层根据PDU中的指示信息，确定该PDU对应的是Uu SRB1还是SL SRB。如果该PDU对应的是Uu SRB1，中继终端设备将该适配层SDU通过中继终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载发送给网络设备。如果该PDU对应的是SL SRB，中继终端设备将适配层SDU递交给SL SRB对应的PDCP实体。从而可以实现区分不同的SRB对应的数据包。
当网络设备要向远端终端设备传输Uu SRB1，或者，中继终端设备需要向远端终端设备传输SL SRB时，网络设备的Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，经过PDCP实体的处理后，将PDCP PDU通过网络设备与中继终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。中继终端设备收到该PDCP PDU后，将PDCP PDU递交给适配层。适配层设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB1，将PDCP PDU加上该指示信息，形成适配层PDU。如果是SL SRB，中继终端设备的SL SRB对应的PDCP实体的接收上层的SDU，经过PDCP实体的处理后，将PDCP PDU递交给适配层。适配层设置指示信息指示为SL SRB，将PDCP PDU加上该指示信息，形成适配层的PDU。中继终端设备将适配层的PDU通过Uu SRB1和SL SRB对应的SL RLC承载发送给远端终端设备。具体的，中继终端设备将该适配层的PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将RLC PDU发送给远端终端设备，远端终端设备便可以在该SL逻辑信道上接收到中继终端设备发送的RLC PDU。在远端终端设备将该RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过RLC实体处理后得到 RLC SDU，将RLC SDU递交给适配层，适配层根据RLC SDU中的指示信息，确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1还是SL SRB，经适配层处理得到适配层SDU，进而将适配层的SDU递交给对应的PDCP实体，PDCP实体处理后将PDCP SDU递交给上层。
另一种可能实现方式为：当多个不同的Uu SRB与一个SL SRB使用相同的SL RLC承载的情况下，例如，Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2与一个SL SRB1复用一个SL RLC承载，或者，Uu SRB0、Uu SRB2、Uu SRB3与一个SL SRB1复用一个SL RLC承载。在这种情况下，适配层在该数据包(例如PDCP PDU或者RLC SDU)中添加的指示信息的长度可以大于或者等于2比特。该指示信息用于指示：该数据包对应的是Uu SRB还是为SL SRB，以及在指示数据包对应的是Uu SRB的情况下，进一步指示该数据包对应的是哪一个Uu SRB，换句话说，该指示信息可以指示该数据包对应的SRB为该多个Uu SRB和一个SL SRB中的哪一个SRB。
例如，假设Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2与一个SL SRB1复用一个SL RLC承载，则适配层可以在数据包中添加2比特的指示信息，可以预先定义或者配置不同的SRB与指示信息不同的取值之间的对应关系，例如，2比特指示位为“00”用于指示该数据包对应的是SL SRB，2比特指示位为“10”用于指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB1，2比特指示位为“11”用于指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB2。或者，在上述的例子中，2比特指示位中的第一比特用于指示该数据包对应的是SL SRB还是Uu SRB，在确定第一比特指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB的情况下，进一步读取第二比特位，第二比特位用于指示该Uu SRB是Uu SRB1还是Uu SRB2。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，该指示信息可以是将数据包本身包括的一些比特位(例如现有预留比特位)定义来指示数据包对应的SRB。本申请实施例在此不作限制。
还应理解，在多个不同的Uu SRB与一个SL SRB使用相同的SL RLC承载的情况，与一个Uu SRB与一个SL SRB使用相同的SL RLC承载的情况，这两种情况下数据包分别包括的指示信息可以不同。例如，这两种情况下的指示信息可以分别位于数据包中的不同字段，并且长度可以不同等。
在本申请另一些可能的实现方式中，除了上述的在远端终端设备和中继终端设备的协议栈中新增适配层的方式之外，还可以不用新增加适配层，远端终端设备和中继终端设备可以使用数据包(例如PDCP PDU或者RLC SDU)中的一个或多个比特指示该数据包对应的是(或者属于)Uu SRB还是为SL SRB。例如，远端终端设备和中继终端设备的PDCP层实体可以分别将PDCP PDU的头部(header)中的一个或多个比特作为指示信息指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB还是为SL SRB，或者解析该指示信息。应理解，由于Uu SRB0承载的数据包没有经过PDCP层，因此，可以为Uu SRB0配置与SL SRB不同的RLC承载。
图23所示的为现有技术中Uu SRB承载的PDCP PDU格式的示意图，图24所示的为现有技术中SL SRB承载的PDU格式的示意图，图23和图24中，R表示预留比特，图中的一个八位字节(Oct，octet)表示8比特(bits)构成的一个字节(byte)，两种PDU格式中，Oct 1中第4比特都为R。因此，可以使用Oct 1中第4比特来指示该PDU对应的是Uu SRB还是为SL SRB。
一种可能的实现方式为：当一个Uu SRB与一个SL SRB使用相同的SL RLC承 载的情况下，PDCP层可以利用Oct 1中第4比特指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB还是为SL SRB，可以预定义或者预配置指示信息的不同取值与Uu SRB和SL SRB之间的对应关系。例如，Oct 1中第4比特的值为1，指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB，当Oct1中第4比特的值为0，指示该数据包对应的是SL SRB。
例如，假设Uu SRB1和SL SRB复用一个SL RLC承载：
当远端终端设备要向网络设备传输Uu SRB1，或者远端终端设备需要向中继终端设备传输SL SRB时，如果是Uu SRB1，远端终端设备的Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB1。如果是SL SRB，SL SRB对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中设置指示信息指示为SL SRB。之后，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体或SL SRB对应的PDCP实体将PDCP PDU通过Uu SRB1和SL SRB对应的SL RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。具体的，PDCP实体将PDCP PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将RLC PDU发送给中继终端设备。中继终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到远端终端设备发送的RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC SDU，中继终端设备根据RLC SDU中的指示信息(例如为Oct 1中第4比特)，当确定指示信息指示的为Uu SRB，则将该RLC SDU发送给网络设备。当指示信息指示的为SL SRB，则递交给SL SRB对应的PDCP实体。或者，RLC实体将RLC SDU递交给SL SRB对应的PDCP实体，SL SRB对应的PDCP实体根据RLC SDU中的指示信息，确定是否指示的是SL SRB，如果不是，则将RLC SDU丢掉，如果是，则处理该RLC SDU。中继终端设备还将该RLC SDU发送给网络设备。网络设备的Uu SRB对应的PDCP实体根据RLC SDU中的指示信息，确定是否指示的是Uu SRB，如果不是，则将RLC SDU丢掉，如果是，则处理该RLC SDU。
当网络设备要向远端终端设备传输Uu SRB1，网络设备的Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中设置指示信息指示为Uu SRB1，之后，网络设备将PDCP PDU通过网络设备与中继终端设备之间的RLC承载发送给中继终端设备。当中继终端设备需要向远端终端设备发送SL SRB时，中继终端设备的SL SRB对应的PDCP实体接收上层的SDU，该PDCP实体在PDCP PDU中设置指示信息指示为SL SRB。中继终端设备通过Uu SRB1和SL SRB对应的SL RLC承载将PDCP PDU发送给远端终端设备。具体的，中继终端设备将该PDCP PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给MAC实体，MAC实体使用该SL RLC承载对应的SL逻辑信道将RLC PDU发送给远端终端设备。远端终端设备在该SL逻辑信道上接收到中继终端设备发送的RLC PDU，将RLC PDU递交给该SL RLC承载对应的RLC实体，经过该RLC实体处理后得到RLC SDU，远端终端设备根据该RLC SDU中的指示信息，确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1还是SL SRB。以Uu SRB1为例，远端终端设备可以确定出该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1后，再将该RLC SDU递交给Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体。或者，远端终端设备将该RLC SDU分别递交给Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体和SL SRB对应 的PDCP实体，Uu SRB1对应的PDCP实体根据指示信息确定该RLC SDU对应的是Uu SRB1，SL SRB对应的PDCP实体根据指示信息确定该RLC SDU对应的不是Uu SRB1，SL SRB对应的PDCP实体可以将该RLC SDU丢弃。
另一种可能实现方式为：当多个不同的Uu SRB与一个SL SRB使用相同的SL RLC承载的情况下，例如，Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2与一个SL SRB1复用一个SL RLC承载，在这种情况下，该指示信息可以的长度可以为多个比特，用于指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB还是为SL SRB，以及指示是哪一个Uu SRB。也可以预先定义或者配置不同的SRB与指示信息不同的取值之间的对应关系。
例如，当Uu SRB1、Uu SRB2与一个SL SRB1复用一个SL RLC承载的情况下，则可以利用Oct 1中第4比特和第3比特联合作为指示信息。例如，2比特指示位为“00”用于指示该数据包对应的是SL SRB，2比特指示位为“01”用于指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB1，2比特指示位为“10”用于指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB2。
利用远端终端设备和中继终端设备的协议栈中本身存在的协议层(例如PDCP层对应的PDCP实体)在数据包中设置一个或多个比特指示该数据包对应的是Uu SRB还是为SL SRB，或者，进一步的指示哪一个Uu SRB，不用新增新的协议层，实现比较简单，复杂度低，并且，可以进一步的提高逻辑信道资源的利用率。
第一SRB与第二SRB对应同一个SL RLC承载可以是在预先定义的。例如，在标准协议中定义第一SRB与第二SRB对应同一个SL RLC承载/同一个LCID。例如，定义Uu SRB0与SL SRB0对应同一个SL RLC承载/同一个LCID，或者，Uu SRB1与SL SRB1对应同一个SL RLC承载/同一个LCID，或者，Uu SRB2与SL SRB2对应同一个SL RLC承载/同一个LCID。或者，在标准协议中规定第一SRB对应第一SL RLC承载/第一LCID，并且规定第二SRB也对应第一SL RLC承载/第一LCID。例如，规定Uu SRB0对应第一SL RLC承载/第一LCID，并且规定SL SRB0也对应第一SL RLC承载/第一LCID。
第一SRB与第二SRB对应同一个SL RLC承载还可以是网络配置的。网络配置第一SRB与第二SRB对应同一个SL RLC承载/同一个LCID。例如，在第一SRB的配置信息中包括第二SRB的标识或索引。或者，网络配置第一SRB对应第一SL RLC承载/第一LCID，并且配置第二SRB也对应第一SL RLC承载/第一LCID。网络配置第一SL RLC承载和第一SRB的方法可以使用本申请实施例的方法。
第一终端设备与网络设备之间传输的SRB或DRB，还经过第二终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载传输。网络设备可以配置该SRB或DRB与该RLC承载的对应关系或映射关系或关联关系。例如，网络设备向第二终端设备发送信息，该信息包括或指示第一SRB的标识或索引，以及对应的第二终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载的标识或索引。或者，网络设备向第二终端设备发送信息，该信息包括或指示第一SRB的标识或索引，以及对应的第二终端设备与网络设备之间的逻辑信道标识。
网络设备还可以配置该SRB或DRB对应的第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的RLC承载(第一SL RLC承载)，和第二终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载的对应关系或映射关系或关联关系。例如，网络设备向第二终端设备发送信息，该信息包括或指示第一SL RLC承载的标识或索引，以及对应的第二终端设备与网络设备之间的 RLC承载的标识或索引。或者，网络设备向第二终端设备发送信息，该信息包括或指示第一SL RLC承载的标识或索引，以及对应的第二终端设备与网络设备之间的逻辑信道标识。或者，网络设备向第二终端设备发送信息，该信息包括或指示第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识，以及对应的第二终端设备与网络设备之间的RLC承载的标识或索引。或者，网络设备向第二终端设备发送信息，该信息包括或指示第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识，以及对应的第二终端设备与网络设备之间的逻辑信道标识。
应理解，上述只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例，而非要限制本申请实施例的范围。本领域技术人员根据所给出的上述示例，显然可以进行各种等价的修改或变化，例如，上述方法200至方法600中的各个实施例中某些步骤可以是不必须的，或者可以新加入某些步骤等。或者上述任意两种或者任意多种实施例的组合。这样的修改、变化或者组合后的方案也落入本申请实施例的范围内。
还应理解，上文对本申请实施例的描述着重于强调各个实施例之间的不同之处，未提到的相同或相似之处可以互相参考，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
还应理解，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，“预先设定”、“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如，包括终端和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现，本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的方式、情况、类别以及实施例的划分仅是为了描述的方便，不应构成特别的限定，各种方式、类别、情况以及实施例中的特征在不矛盾的情况下可以相结合。
还应理解，在本申请的各个实施例中，如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突，不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用，不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。
以上结合图1至图24对本申请实施例提供的方法做了详细说明。以下，结合图25至图27对本申请实施例的通信装置进行详细说明。
图25示出了本申请实施例的通信装置700的示意性框图。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信装置700可以对应上述方法200至方法500描述的第一终端设备(远端终端设备)，也可以是应用于第一终端设备的芯片或组件，并且，该通信装置700中各模块或单元分别用于执行上述方法200至方法500中第一终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程。如图25所示，该通信装置700包括收发单元710和处理单元720。收发单元710用于在处理单元720的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。
该收发单元710，用于通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该通信装置和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；
该处理单元720，用于根据该第一配置信息，建立该第一SL RLC承载，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB；
该收发单元710，还用于通过该第二终端设备在该至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。
本申请提供的通信装置，该通信装置可以第一SL RLC承载，从而可以通过该第二终端设备在至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。实现了该通信装置第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上，利用SL RLC承载传输Uu SRB，可以保障该通信装置的Uu SRB上的控制信令的正常传输，提高Uu SRB传输的控制信令的质量和效率。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该第一SL RLC承载与该侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，该第二SL RLC承载对应第二信令无线承载SRB，该通信装置在该第二SRB上与该第二终端设备传输控制信令。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该第一配置信息，包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、该至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该收发单元710，还用于向该第二终端设备发送第二配置信息，该第二配置信息是根据该第一配置信息确定的。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该第二配置信息包括：
该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID，该LCID用于标识该第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该第一配置信息是该第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的，该第三配置信息为该网络设备发送给该第二终端设备的，该第三配置信息用于该第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该收发单元710，还用于通过该第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，该第四配置包括该至少一个第一SRB中每一个第一SRB的配置信息，该第一SRB的配置信息包括：该第一SRB对应的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP配置信息，以及该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该收发单元710，还用于向该第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，该第五配置信息包括或指示：该第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，和，该至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该至少一个第一SRB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该PDCP PDU对应的第一SRB。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该通信装置的协议栈中包括适配层，该适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，该至少一个第一SRB的适配层协议数据单元PDU中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该适配层PDU对应的第一SRB。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，至少第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少一个。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该第一配置信息是网络设备确定的。网络设备通过第二终端设备向该通信装置发送第一配置信息。例如，该第一配置信息是网络设备先发给第二终端设备，第二终端设备转发给该通信装置。即该通信装置通过第二终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，该通信装置700包括收发单元710和处理单元720。收发单元710用于在处理单元720的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。
处理单元720，用于获取第一配置信息，该第一配置信息是预先定义的，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备和第二终端设备(即中继终端设备)之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；处理单元720，还用于根据第一配置信息，建立第一SL RLC承载，第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB；第一终端设备通过第二终端设备在至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。
可选的，在本申请实施例中，该第一SL RLC承载还可以对应的是至少一个第一DRB，第一DRB可以理解为Uu DRB，第一DRB用于传输第一终端设备和网络设备之间的用户面数据。即该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一DRB，或者，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一SRB。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，该通信装置700可以对应上述方法600描述的第一终端设备(远端终端设备)，也可以是应用于第一终端设备的芯片或组件，并且，该通信装置700中各模块或单元分别用于执行上述方法600的各个实施例中第一终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程。该通信装置700包括收发单元710和处理单元720。收发单元710用于在处理单元720的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。
该收发单元710，用于获取数据包；
该处理单元720，用于根据该数据包中的指示信息，确定该数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，其中，该通信装置通过该第二终端设备在该第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，该通信装置在该第二SRB上与该第二终端设备传输控制信令。
本申请提供的通信装置，在第一SRB与第二SRB承载的数据包均在该通信装置和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上传输时，通过解析数据包中携带的指示信息，根据该指示信息，确定该数据包为第一SRB还是为第二SRB承载的数据包，从而可以实现区分第一SRB和第二SRB承载的数据包，从而保证了数据包的准确传输，提高数据传输效率和用户体验。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该第一SRB和该第二SRB均对应该通信装置和该第二设备之间的侧行链路上相同的侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该通信装置的协议栈中包括适配层，该适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，该处理单元，还用于根据该适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定该适配层协PDU对应该第一SRB或者第二SRB。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该处理单元720，还用于根据分组数据汇聚协议数据单PDCP PDU中的指示信息，确定该PDCP PDU对应该第一SRB或者该第二SRB。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该第一SRB为多个第一SRB，该指示信息还用于指示：在该多个第一SRB中，该数据包对应的第一SRB。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，该指示信息位于该数据包中的第一个八位字 节oct中的第四比特和/或第三比特。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，多个第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少两个。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，该通信装置700可以对应上述方法200至方法500中描述的第二终端设备(中继终端设备)，也可以是应用于第二终端设备的芯片或组件，并且，该通信装置700中各模块或单元分别用于执行上述方法200至方法500的各个实施例中第二终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程。该通信装置700包括收发单元710和处理单元720。收发单元710用于在处理单元720的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。
处理单元720，用于获取第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置该第一终端设备(远端终端设备)和该通信装置之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；处理单元720，还用于根据该第一配置信息，建立该第一SL RLC承载，该第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，收发单元710，用于接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息，可选的，收发单元710，还用于直接将该第一配置信息转发给第一终端设备，处理单元720不对该第一配置信息进行解析；收发单元710，还用于接收第一终端设备发送的第二配置信息，该第二配置信息是根据该第一配置信息确定的。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，收发单元710，用于接收网络设备发送的第三配置信息；处理单元720，还用于根据第三配置信息，确定第一配置信息，第三配置信息用于该第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载；收发单元710，还用于向第一终端设备发送第一配置信息。
可选的，在本申请的一些实施例中，收发单元710，用于接收网络设备发送的第三配置信息，第三配置信息用于第二终端设备建立该第一SL RLC承载，第三配置信息是根据第一配置信息确定的。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，该通信装置700可以对应上述方法200至方法500中描述的网络设备，也可以是应用于网络设备的芯片或组件，并且，该通信装置700中各模块或单元分别用于执行上述方法200至方法500的各个实施例中网络设备所执行的各动作或处理过程。该通信装置700包括收发单元710和处理单元720。收发单元710用于在处理单元720的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。
进一步的，该通信装置700还可以该存储单元，收发单元710可以是收发器、输入/输出接口或接口电路。存储单元用于存储收发单元710和处理单元720执行的指令。收发单元710、处理单元720和存储单元相互耦合，存储单元存储指令，处理单元720用于执行存储单元存储的指令，收发单元710用于在处理单元720的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。
应理解，通信装置700中各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程请参照前文中结合方法200至方法600、以及图11至图15、图17至图21所示的中相关实施例的第一终端设备相关的描述，为了简洁，这里不加赘述。
可选的，收发单元710可以包括接收单元(模块)和发送单元(模块)，用于执行前述方法200至方法600、以及图11至图15、图17至图21所示的实施例中第一终 端设备(远端终端设备)接收信息和发送信息的步骤。
应理解，收发单元710可以是收发器、输入/输出接口或接口电路。存储单元可以是存储器。处理单元720可由处理器实现。如图26所示，通信装置800可以包括处理器810、存储器820、收发器830和总线系统840。通信装置800的各个组件通过总线系统840耦合在一起，其中总线系统840除包括数据总线之外，还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见，在图25中将各种总线都标为总线系统840。为便于表示，图26中仅是示意性画出。
图25所示的通信装置700或图26所示的通信装置800能够实现前述本申请提供的方法的各个实施例中第一终端设备(远端终端设备)执行的步骤。类似的描述可以参考前述对应的方法中的描述。为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
还应理解，图25所示的通信装置700或图26所示的通信装置800可以为终端设备。
还应理解，以上通信装置中单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分，实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上，也可以物理上分开。且通信装置中的单元可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现；也可以全部以硬件的形式实现；还可以部分单元以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现，部分单元以硬件的形式实现。例如，各个单元可以为单独设立的处理元件，也可以集成在装置的某一个芯片中实现，此外，也可以以程序的形式存储于存储器中，由装置的某一个处理元件调用并执行该单元的功能。这里该处理元件又可以称为处理器，可以是一种具有信号处理能力的集成电路。在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤或以上各个单元可以通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路实现或者以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现。
在一个例子中，以上任一通信装置中的单元可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路，例如：一个或多个专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，或，一个或多个数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，或，一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)，或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。再如，当装置中的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时，该处理元件可以是通用处理器，例如中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如，这些单元可以集成在一起，以片上系统(system-on-a-chip，SOC)的形式实现。
图27为本申请提供的一种终端设备900的结构示意图。上述的通信装置700或者800可以配置在该终端设备900中。或者，该通信装置700或者800本身可以即为该终端设备900。或者说，该终端设备900可以执行上述方法200至方法600中第一终端设备执行的动作。
为了便于说明，图27仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图27所示，终端设备900包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。
处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对整个终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据，例如用于支持终端设备执行上述传输预编码矩阵的指示方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据，例如存储上述实施例中所描述的码本。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以 及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器，主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。
当终端设备开机后，处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序，解释并执行软件程序的指令，处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。
本领域技术人员可以理解，为了便于说明，图27仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中，可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
例如，处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器，基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。图27中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能，本领域技术人员可以理解，基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器，通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解，终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式，终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力，终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。该基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。该中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中，也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中，由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。
示例性的，在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备900的收发单元901，将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备900的处理单元902。如图27所示，终端设备900包括收发单元901和处理单元902。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元901中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元901中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元501包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的，接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解，本申请实施例中，该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器 (electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
上述实施例，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行该计算机指令或计算机程序时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。该计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。
本实施例还提供了一种计算机存储介质，该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机指令，当该计算机指令在通信装置上运行时，使得通信装置执行上述相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法和侧行链路数据包传输的方法。
本实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述相关步骤，以实现上述实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法和侧行链路数据包传输的方法。
另外，本申请的实施例还提供了一种装置，该装置具体可以是芯片，组件或模块，该装置可包括相连的处理器和存储器；其中，存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当装置运行时，处理器可执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令，以使芯片执行上述各方法实施例中的信令无线承载配置的方法和侧行链路数据包传输的方法。
其中，本实施例提供的通信装置、计算机存储介质、计算机程序产品或芯片均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
结合以上，本申请还提供了如下实施例：
实施例1：一种无线承载配置的方法，该方法包括：
第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置所述第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；
所述第一终端设备根据所述第一配置信息，建立所述第一SL RLC承载，所述第 一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一无线承载RB；
所述第一终端设备通过所述第二终端设备在所述至少一个第一RB上与网络设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例2：根据实施例1所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，所述第一SL RLC承载与所述侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，所述第二SL RLC承载对应第二无线承载RB，所述第一终端设备在所述第二RB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例3：根据实施例1或实施例2所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，所述第一配置信息，包括：
所述第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、所述至少一个第一RB的标识或索引、或者所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
实施例4：根据实施例1至3中任一实施例所述的无线承载配置的方法，该无线承载配置的方法还包括：
所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息确定的。
实施例5：根据实施例4所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，所述第二配置信息包括：
所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID，所述LCID用于标识所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道。
实施例6：根据实施例1至实施例3中任一实施例所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，所述第一配置信息是所述第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的，所述第三配置信息为所述网络设备发送给所述第二终端设备的，所述第三配置信息用于所述第二终端设备建立所述第一SL RLC承载。
实施例7：根据实施例1至实施例6中任一实施例所述的无线承载配置的方法，该无线承载配置的方法还包括：
所述第一终端设备通过所述第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，所述第四配置包括所述至少一个第一RB中每一个第一RB的配置信息，所述第一RB的配置信息包括：所述第一RB对应的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP配置信息，以及所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
实施例8：根据实施例7所述的无线承载配置的方法，所述无线承载配置的方法还包括：
所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，所述第五配置信息包括或指示：所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，和，所述至少一个第一RB的标识或索引。
实施例9：根据实施例7或实施例8所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，所述至少一个第一RB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述PDCP PDU对应的第一RB。
实施例10：根据实施例7或实施例8所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，所述第一终端设备的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，所述至少一个第一RB的适配层协议数据单元PDU中包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述适配层PDU对应的第一RB。
实施例11：根据实施例1至实施例10中任一实施例所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，至少第一RB包括第一RB0、第一RB1、第一RB2、第一RB3中的至少一个。
实施例12：根据实施例1至实施例11中任一实施例所述的无线承载配置的方法，其中，所述RB为信令无线承载SRB或数据无线承载DRB。
实施例13：一种侧行链路数据包传输的方法，该方法包括：
第一终端设备获取数据包；
所述第一终端设备根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一无线承载RB或者第二RB，其中，所述第一终端设备通过所述第二终端设备在所述第一RB上与网络设备传输控制信令或数据，所述第一终端设备在所述第二RB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例14：根据实施例13所述的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其中，所述第一RB和所述第二RB均对应所述第一终端设备和所述第二设备之间的侧行链路上相同的侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载。
实施例15：根据实施例13或实施例14所述的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其中，所述第一终端设备的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，所述第一终端设备根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一无线承载RB或者第二RB，包括：
所述终端设备根据所述适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定所述适配层协PDU对应所述第一RB或者第二RB。
实施例16：根据实施例13或实施例14所述的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其中，所述第一终端设备根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一无线承载RB或者第二RB，包括：
所述第一终端设备根据分组数据汇聚协议数据单PDCP PDU中的指示信息，确定所述PDCP PDU对应所述第一RB或者所述第二RB。
实施例17：根据实施例13至实施例16中任一实施例所述的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其中，所述第一RB为多个第一RB，所述指示信息还用于指示：在所述多个第一RB中，所述数据包对应的第一RB。
实施例18：根据实施例13至实施例17中任一实施例所述的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其中，所述指示信息位于所述数据包中的第一个八位字节oct中的第四比特和/或第三比特。
实施例19：根据实施例17所述的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其中，多个第一RB包括第一RB0、第一RB1、第一RB2、第一RB3中的至少两个。
实施例20：根据实施例13至实施例19中任一实施例所述的侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其中，所述RB为信令无线承载SRB或数据无线承载DRB。
实施例21：一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：处理单元和收发单元。
所述收发单元，用于通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置所述通信装置和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；
所述处理单元，用于根据所述第一配置信息，建立所述第一SL RLC承载，所述第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一无线承载RB；
所述收发单元，还用于通过所述第二终端设备在所述至少一个第一RB上与网络设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例22：根据实施例21所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一SL RLC承载与所述侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，所述第二SL RLC承载对应第二无线承载RB，所述通信装置在所述第二RB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例23：根据实施例21或实施例22所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一配置信息，包括：
所述第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、所述至少一个第一RB的标识或索引、或者所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
实施例24：根据实施例21至实施例23中任一实施例所述的通信装置，所述收发单元，还用于向所述第二终端设备发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息确定的。
实施例25：根据实施例24所述的通信装置，其中，所述第二配置信息包括：
所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID，所述LCID用于标识所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道。
实施例26：根据实施例21至实施例25中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一配置信息是所述第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的，所述第三配置信息为所述网络设备发送给所述第二终端设备的，所述第三配置信息用于所述第二终端设备建立所述第一SL RLC承载。
实施例27：根据实施例21至实施例26中任一实施例所述的通信装置，所述收发单元，还用于通过所述第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，所述第四配置包括所述至少一个第一RB中每一个第一RB的配置信息，所述第一RB的配置信息包括：所述第一RB对应的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP配置信息，以及所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
实施例28：根据实施例27所述的通信装置，所述收发单元，还用于向所述第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，所述第五配置信息包括或指示：所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，和，所述至少一个第一RB的标识或索引。
实施例29：根据实施例27或实施例28所述的通信装置，其中，所述至少一个第一RB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述PDCP PDU对应的第一RB。
实施例30：根据实施例27或实施例28所述的通信装置，其中，所述通信装置的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议 PDCP层之间，所述至少一个第一RB的适配层协议数据单元PDU中包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述适配层PDU对应的第一RB。
实施例31：根据实施例21至实施例30中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，至少第一RB包括第一RB0、第一RB1、第一RB2、第一RB3中的至少一个。
实施例32：根据实施例21至实施例31中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述RB为信令无线承载SRB或数据无线承载DRB。
实施例33：一种通信装置，该通信装置包括：处理单元和收发单元。
所述收发单元，用于获取数据包；
所述处理单元，用于根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一无线承载RB或者第二RB，其中，所述通信装置通过所述第二终端设备在所述第一RB上与网络设备传输控制信令或数据，所述通信装置在所述第二RB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例34：根据实施例33所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一RB和所述第二RB均对应所述通信装置和所述第二设备之间的侧行链路上相同的侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载。
实施例35：根据实施例33或实施例34所述的通信装置，其中，所述通信装置的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，所述处理单元，还用于根据所述适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定所述适配层协PDU对应所述第一RB或者第二RB。
实施例36：根据实施例33或实施例34所述的通信装置，所述处理单元，还用于根据分组数据汇聚协议数据单PDCP PDU中的指示信息，确定所述PDCP PDU对应所述第一RB或者所述第二RB。
实施例37：根据实施例33至实施例36中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一RB为多个第一RB，所述指示信息还用于指示：在所述多个第一RB中，所述数据包对应的第一RB。
实施例38：根据实施例33至实施例37中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述指示信息位于所述数据包中的第一个八位字节oct中的第四比特和/或第三比特。
实施例39：根据实施例37所述的通信装置，其中，多个第一RB包括第一RB0、第一RB1、第一RB2、第一RB3中的至少两个。
实施例40：根据实施例33至实施例39中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述RB为信令无线承载SRB或数据无线承载DRB。
实施例41：一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，该通信装置包括：处理器和存储器，存储器存储有指令，当指令被处理器执行时，使得通信装置执行以下步骤：
通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置所述通信装置和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；
根据所述第一配置信息，建立所述第一SL RLC承载，所述第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一无线承载RB；
通过所述第二终端设备在所述至少一个第一RB上与网络设备传输控制信令数据。
实施例42：根据实施例41所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一SL RLC承载与所述侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，所述第二SL RLC承载对应第二无线承载RB，所述通信装置在所述第二RB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例43：根据实施例41或实施例42所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一配置信息，包括：
所述第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、所述至少一个第一RB的标识或索引、或者所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
实施例44：根据实施例41至实施例43中任一实施例所述的通信装置，所述通信装置还执行以下步骤：向所述第二终端设备发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息确定的。
实施例45：根据实施例44所述的通信装置，其中，所述第二配置信息包括：
所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID，所述LCID用于标识所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道。
实施例46：根据实施例41至实施例45中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一配置信息是所述第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的，所述第三配置信息为所述网络设备发送给所述第二终端设备的，所述第三配置信息用于所述第二终端设备建立所述第一SL RLC承载。
实施例47：根据实施例41至实施例46中任一实施例所述的通信装置，所述通信装置还执行以下步骤：通过所述第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，所述第四配置包括所述至少一个第一RB中每一个第一RB的配置信息，所述第一RB的配置信息包括：所述第一RB对应的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP配置信息，以及所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
实施例48：根据实施例47所述的通信装置，所述通信装置还执行以下步骤：向所述第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，所述第五配置信息包括或指示：所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，和，所述至少一个第一RB的标识或索引。
实施例49：根据实施例47或实施例48所述的通信装置，其中，所述至少一个第一RB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述PDCP PDU对应的第一RB。
实施例50：根据实施例48或实施例49所述的通信装置，其中，所述通信装置的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，所述至少一个第一RB的适配层协议数据单元PDU中包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述适配层PDU对应的第一RB。
实施例51：根据实施例41至实施例50中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，至少第一RB包括第一RB0、第一RB1、第一RB2、第一RB3中的至少一个。
实施例52：根据实施例41至实施例51中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述RB为信令无线承载SRB或数据无线承载DRB。
实施例53：一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为终端或者终端中的芯片或者片上系统，该通信装置包括：处理器和存储器，存储器存储有指令，当指令被处理器执行时，使得通信装置执行以下步骤：
获取数据包；
根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一无线承载RB或者第二RB，其中，所述通信装置通过所述第二终端设备在所述第一RB上与网络设备传输控制信令或数据，所述通信装置在所述第二RB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令或数据。
实施例54：根据实施例53所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一RB和所述第二RB均对应所述通信装置和所述第二设备之间的侧行链路上相同的侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载。
实施例55：根据实施例53或实施例54所述的通信装置，其中，所述通信装置的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，所述通信装置还执行以下步骤：根据所述适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定所述适配层协PDU对应所述第一RB或者第二RB。
实施例56：根据实施例54或实施例55所述的通信装置，所述通信装置还执行以下步骤：根据分组数据汇聚协议数据单PDCP PDU中的指示信息，确定所述PDCP PDU对应所述第一RB或者所述第二RB。
实施例57：根据实施例53至实施例56中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述第一RB为多个第一RB，所述指示信息还用于指示：在所述多个第一RB中，所述数据包对应的第一RB。
实施例58：根据实施例53至实施例57中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述指示信息位于所述数据包中的第一个八位字节oct中的第四比特和/或第三比特。
实施例59：根据实施例57所述的通信装置，其中，多个第一RB包括第一RB0、第一RB1、第一RB2、第一RB3中的至少两个。
实施例60：根据实施例53至实施例59中任一实施例所述的通信装置，其中，所述RB为信令无线承载SRB或数据无线承载DRB。
实施例61：一种计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述实施例1至实施例12任一实施例所涉及的方法。
实施例62：一种计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述实施例13至实施例20任一实施例所涉及的方法。
实施例63：一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述实施例1至实施例12任一实施例所涉及的方法。
实施例64：一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机可以执行上述实施例13至实施例20任一实施例所涉及的方法。
实施例65：一种芯片，该芯片包括处理器，当该处理器执行指令时，处理器用于执行上述实施例1至实施例12任一实施例所涉及的方法。该指令可以来自芯片内部的 存储器，也可以来自芯片外部的存储器。可选的，该芯片还包括输入输出电路。
实施例66：一种芯片，该芯片包括处理器，当该处理器执行指令时，处理器用于执行上述实施例13至实施例20任一实施例所涉及的方法。该指令可以来自芯片内部的存储器，也可以来自芯片外部的存储器。可选的，该芯片还包括输入输出电路。
通过以上实施方式的描述，所属领域的技术人员可以了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机，芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (21)

  1. 一种信令无线承载配置的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一终端设备通过第二终端设备接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息包括或指示用于配置所述第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上的第一侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载的信息；
    所述第一终端设备根据所述第一配置信息，建立所述第一SL RLC承载，所述第一SL RLC承载对应至少一个第一信令无线承载SRB；
    所述第一终端设备通过所述第二终端设备在所述至少一个第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一SL RLC承载与所述侧行链路上的第二SL RLC承载不同，所述第二SL RLC承载对应第二信令无线承载SRB，所述第一终端设备在所述第二SRB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息，包括：
    所述第一SL RLC承载对应的SL RLC配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的配置信息、所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识、所述至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引、或者所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID中的一个或多个。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息是根据所述第一配置信息确定的。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二配置信息包括：
    所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道标识LCID，所述LCID用于标识所述第一SL RLC承载对应的逻辑信道。
  6. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息是所述第二终端设备根据第三配置信息确定的，所述第三配置信息为所述网络设备发送给所述第二终端设备的，所述第三配置信息用于所述第二终端设备建立所述第一SL RLC承载。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端设备通过所述第二终端设备接收第四配置信息，所述第四配置包括所述至少一个第一SRB中每一个第一SRB的配置信息，所述第一SRB的配置信息包括：所述第一SRB对应的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP配置信息，以及所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送第五配置信息，所述第五配置信息包括或指示：所述第一SL RLC承载的索引或者标识，和，所述至少一个第一SRB的标识或索引。
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个第一SRB的分组数据汇聚协议数据单元PDCP PDU包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述PDCP PDU对应的第一SRB。
  10. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端设备的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，所述至少一个第一SRB的适配层协议数据单元PDU中包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述适配层PDU对应的第一SRB。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，至少第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少一个。
  12. 一种侧行链路数据包传输的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一终端设备获取数据包；
    所述第一终端设备根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，其中，所述第一终端设备通过第二终端设备在所述第一SRB上与网络设备传输控制信令，所述第一终端设备在所述第二SRB上与所述第二终端设备传输控制信令。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一SRB和所述第二SRB均对应所述第一终端设备和所述第二终端设备之间的侧行链路上相同的侧行链路无线链路控制SL RLC承载。
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端设备的协议栈中包括适配层，所述适配层位于无线链路控制RLC层和分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层之间，所述第一终端设备根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，包括：
    所述终端设备根据所述适配层协议数据单元PDU中的指示信息，确定所述适配层协PDU对应所述第一SRB或者第二SRB。
  15. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一终端设备根据所述数据包中的指示信息，确定所述数据包对应第一信令无线承载SRB或者第二SRB，包括：
    所述第一终端设备根据分组数据汇聚协议数据单PDCP PDU中的指示信息，确定所述PDCP PDU对应所述第一SRB或者所述第二SRB。
  16. 根据权利要求12至15中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一SRB为多个第一SRB，所述指示信息还用于指示：在所述多个第一SRB中，所述数据包对应的第一SRB。
  17. 根据权利要求12至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述指示信息位于所述数据包中的第一个八位字节oct中的第四比特和/或第三比特。
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，多个第一SRB包括第一SRB0、第一SRB1、第一SRB2、第一SRB3中的至少两个。
  19. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器与至少一个存储器耦合：
    所述至少一个处理器，用于执行所述至少一个存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令，以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求12至18中任一项所述的方法。
  20. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有 计算机程序或指令，当计算机读取并执行所述计算机程序或指令时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求12至18中任一项所述的方法。
  21. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片的通信设备执行如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法，或者执行如权利要求12至18中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/107248 2020-07-24 2021-07-20 侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置 Ceased WO2022017348A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023504619A JP7536996B2 (ja) 2020-07-24 2021-07-20 サイドリンク信号伝達無線ベアラ構成方法および通信装置
US18/006,444 US12550209B2 (en) 2020-07-24 2021-07-20 Sidelink signaling radio bearer configuration method and communications apparatus
EP21845858.6A EP4178145A4 (en) 2020-07-24 2021-07-20 METHOD FOR CONFIGURING SIDELINK SIGNALING RADIO SUPPORT, AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010724475.0A CN113973284B (zh) 2020-07-24 2020-07-24 侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置
CN202010724475.0 2020-07-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022017348A1 true WO2022017348A1 (zh) 2022-01-27

Family

ID=79585681

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/107248 Ceased WO2022017348A1 (zh) 2020-07-24 2021-07-20 侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US12550209B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP4178145A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP7536996B2 (zh)
CN (2) CN113973284B (zh)
WO (1) WO2022017348A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113973284B (zh) * 2020-07-24 2023-12-08 华为技术有限公司 侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置
WO2022032672A1 (zh) * 2020-08-14 2022-02-17 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 无线通信方法和终端
CN114339714B (zh) * 2020-09-29 2023-07-11 维沃移动通信有限公司 传输配置的方法、装置和设备
WO2022233011A1 (zh) * 2021-05-06 2022-11-10 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 建立连接的方法和终端设备
US11711452B2 (en) * 2021-06-02 2023-07-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiplexing sidelink and radio access traffic
CN120017235A (zh) * 2021-10-20 2025-05-16 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法及相关装置
CN117527027A (zh) * 2022-07-29 2024-02-06 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 终端到终端中继场景下数据传输方法、装置、设备及介质
CN117545042A (zh) * 2022-08-02 2024-02-09 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法、通信装置及通信系统
CN117693067A (zh) * 2022-09-09 2024-03-12 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 链路配置方法、装置、拉远终端、网络设备及存储介质
US12581559B2 (en) * 2022-12-14 2026-03-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Repeater association for sidelink
CN118215145A (zh) * 2022-12-16 2024-06-18 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输的方法、装置及系统
WO2025031148A1 (zh) * 2023-08-10 2025-02-13 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法、通信装置及通信系统
WO2025156443A1 (en) * 2024-04-07 2025-07-31 Zte Corporation Method, device and computer program product for wireless communication

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180069618A1 (en) * 2015-07-31 2018-03-08 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Scheduling mechanism for prose relays serving remote ues
CN108029148A (zh) * 2015-07-23 2018-05-11 英特尔Ip公司 层2中继协议和移动性中继方法
CN108391285A (zh) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种设备直通系统的通信方法、数据转发方法及装置
CN111901847A (zh) * 2020-02-13 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 sidelink中继通信方法、装置、设备及介质

Family Cites Families (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9913310B2 (en) * 2014-04-24 2018-03-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for establishing layer-2 entities for D2D communication system and device therefor
WO2015163624A1 (en) * 2014-04-24 2015-10-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for releasing a sidelink radio bearer for d2d communication system and device therefor
US10154425B2 (en) * 2014-04-25 2018-12-11 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for a configuration error management for a sidelink radio bearer and device therefor
US10405275B2 (en) 2015-03-31 2019-09-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for supporting mobility for terminal in wireless communication system and terminal utilizing the method
US11310866B2 (en) * 2016-11-04 2022-04-19 Kyocera Corporation Communication method
CN106656418B (zh) * 2016-11-26 2019-12-10 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 一种无线资源控制消息传输方法及装置
KR102466899B1 (ko) * 2018-08-17 2022-11-14 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 데이터를 송수신하는 방법 및 장치
KR20200049493A (ko) * 2018-10-26 2020-05-08 주식회사 케이티 차량 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 그 장치
WO2020085831A1 (ko) * 2018-10-26 2020-04-30 주식회사 케이티 차량 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 그 장치
CN111417215B (zh) 2019-01-08 2022-04-22 华为技术有限公司 一种无线承载的配置方法、终端及通信装置
JP6997852B2 (ja) * 2020-01-07 2022-01-18 華碩電腦股▲ふん▼有限公司 無線通信システムにおいてサイドリンク送信リソースを要求するための方法及び機器
WO2021207505A1 (en) 2020-04-08 2021-10-14 Idac Holdings, Inc. Device to device relay connection establishment and configuration
CN113543207B (zh) * 2020-04-20 2024-02-09 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种信息传输方法、网络设备及终端
CN113573327B (zh) * 2020-04-28 2023-11-10 维沃移动通信有限公司 远端ue的传输方法、配置方法、装置及电子设备
CN113573422B (zh) * 2020-04-28 2023-10-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 远端终端的连接管理方法、终端及网络侧设备
CN113810923B (zh) * 2020-06-11 2024-06-18 维沃移动通信有限公司 承载配置方法、装置及终端
CN113973284B (zh) * 2020-07-24 2023-12-08 华为技术有限公司 侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置
US20220053418A1 (en) * 2020-08-17 2022-02-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of operating a ue related to a sidelink measurement report in a wireless communication system
KR102736339B1 (ko) * 2020-11-16 2024-11-29 아서스테크 컴퓨터 인코포레이션 무선 통신 시스템에서 uu 무선 베어러 대 pc5 무선 링크 제어(rlc) 베어러 매핑을 위한 방법 및 장치
CN117256163A (zh) * 2021-05-06 2023-12-19 高通股份有限公司 用于针对远程用户装备的无线电资源控制消息递送和配置的技术
KR102491055B1 (ko) * 2021-07-30 2023-01-20 아서스테크 컴퓨터 인코포레이션 무선 통신 시스템에서 ue-대-네트워크 릴레잉을 지원하기 위한 무선 자원 할당을 위한 방법 및 장치
EP4142176A1 (en) * 2021-08-25 2023-03-01 ASUSTek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for a relay user equipment (ue) to support direct to indirect communication path switching in a wireless communication system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108029148A (zh) * 2015-07-23 2018-05-11 英特尔Ip公司 层2中继协议和移动性中继方法
US20180069618A1 (en) * 2015-07-31 2018-03-08 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Scheduling mechanism for prose relays serving remote ues
CN108391285A (zh) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种设备直通系统的通信方法、数据转发方法及装置
CN111901847A (zh) * 2020-02-13 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 sidelink中继通信方法、装置、设备及介质

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
COOLPAD: "Discussion on RRC Message Transportation via L2 Relay UE", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #97 R2-1701248, 18 February 2017 (2017-02-18), XP051222834 *
See also references of EP4178145A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4178145A4 (en) 2024-01-10
US12550209B2 (en) 2026-02-10
CN113973284A (zh) 2022-01-25
US20230269799A1 (en) 2023-08-24
EP4178145A1 (en) 2023-05-10
JP2023535201A (ja) 2023-08-16
JP7536996B2 (ja) 2024-08-20
CN117544923A (zh) 2024-02-09
CN113973284B (zh) 2023-12-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN113973284B (zh) 侧行链路信令无线承载配置的方法和通信装置
CN109716700B (zh) 一种指示方法及相关设备
CN111417215B (zh) 一种无线承载的配置方法、终端及通信装置
CN107466115B (zh) 可穿戴设备的无线承载配置方法与装置
US20230107139A1 (en) Relay discovery method and terminal
EP4033799B1 (en) Relay transmission method, relay terminal and remote terminal
CN113079712B (zh) 双向侧链路无线电链路控制承载
CN115442822A (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2020030047A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及相关设备
US20200170073A1 (en) Method for Repeatedly Transmitting Data and Device
US20250008371A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and storage medium
CN115484615A (zh) 通信方法及通信装置
WO2020200043A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
CN113115261B (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
US20230319908A1 (en) Data transmission method and data transmission apparatus
WO2022141332A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN114793363A (zh) 资源指示方法、终端设备和网络设备
EP4387353B1 (en) Duplication transmission method and apparatus for sl, and device and storage medium
CN112153708A (zh) 一种通信方法及相关设备
CN116250290A (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备、第一接入网设备以及网元
US20240414797A1 (en) Method for relay communication, initiating terminal and relay terminal
EP4583563A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025185403A1 (zh) 通信方法及相关装置
CN121001112A (zh) 中继承载配置的确定方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN105637961A (zh) 通信方法和用户设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21845858

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2023504619

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202317005948

Country of ref document: IN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021845858

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230201

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 18006444

Country of ref document: US

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 202317005948

Country of ref document: IN